TW588213B - Photographic or photothermographic imaging element and method of image formation - Google Patents

Photographic or photothermographic imaging element and method of image formation Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW588213B
TW588213B TW089126841A TW89126841A TW588213B TW 588213 B TW588213 B TW 588213B TW 089126841 A TW089126841 A TW 089126841A TW 89126841 A TW89126841 A TW 89126841A TW 588213 B TW588213 B TW 588213B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
image
substituted
silver
group
link
Prior art date
Application number
TW089126841A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Wojciech K Slusarek
Xiqiang Yang
Mark E Irving
David H Levy
Jared B Mooberry
Original Assignee
Eastman Kodak Co
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US09/475,703 external-priority patent/US6756192B1/en
Application filed by Eastman Kodak Co filed Critical Eastman Kodak Co
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW588213B publication Critical patent/TW588213B/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C7/00Multicolour photographic processes or agents therefor; Regeneration of such processing agents; Photosensitive materials for multicolour processes
    • G03C7/30Colour processes using colour-coupling substances; Materials therefor; Preparing or processing such materials
    • G03C7/305Substances liberating photographically active agents, e.g. development-inhibiting releasing couplers
    • G03C7/30511Substances liberating photographically active agents, e.g. development-inhibiting releasing couplers characterised by the releasing group
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/005Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein
    • G03C1/06Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein with non-macromolecular additives
    • G03C1/42Developers or their precursors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/494Silver salt compositions other than silver halide emulsions; Photothermographic systems ; Thermographic systems using noble metal compounds
    • G03C1/498Photothermographic systems, e.g. dry silver
    • G03C1/49809Organic silver compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/494Silver salt compositions other than silver halide emulsions; Photothermographic systems ; Thermographic systems using noble metal compounds
    • G03C1/498Photothermographic systems, e.g. dry silver
    • G03C1/49827Reducing agents
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C7/00Multicolour photographic processes or agents therefor; Regeneration of such processing agents; Photosensitive materials for multicolour processes
    • G03C7/30Colour processes using colour-coupling substances; Materials therefor; Preparing or processing such materials
    • G03C7/305Substances liberating photographically active agents, e.g. development-inhibiting releasing couplers
    • G03C7/30541Substances liberating photographically active agents, e.g. development-inhibiting releasing couplers characterised by the released group
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/005Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein
    • G03C1/06Silver halide emulsions; Preparation thereof; Physical treatment thereof; Incorporation of additives therein with non-macromolecular additives
    • G03C1/43Processing agents or their precursors, not covered by groups G03C1/07 - G03C1/42
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C1/00Photosensitive materials
    • G03C1/494Silver salt compositions other than silver halide emulsions; Photothermographic systems ; Thermographic systems using noble metal compounds
    • G03C1/498Photothermographic systems, e.g. dry silver
    • G03C1/49836Additives
    • G03C1/49845Active additives, e.g. toners, stabilisers, sensitisers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C7/00Multicolour photographic processes or agents therefor; Regeneration of such processing agents; Photosensitive materials for multicolour processes
    • G03C7/30Colour processes using colour-coupling substances; Materials therefor; Preparing or processing such materials
    • G03C7/392Additives
    • G03C7/39208Organic compounds
    • G03C7/39236Organic compounds with a function having at least two elements among nitrogen, sulfur or oxygen
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03CPHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
    • G03C7/00Multicolour photographic processes or agents therefor; Regeneration of such processing agents; Photosensitive materials for multicolour processes
    • G03C7/30Colour processes using colour-coupling substances; Materials therefor; Preparing or processing such materials
    • G03C7/407Development processes or agents therefor
    • G03C7/413Developers
    • G03C7/4136Developers p-Phenylenediamine or derivatives thereof

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Silver Salt Photography Or Processing Solution Therefor (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
  • Non-Silver Salt Photosensitive Materials And Non-Silver Salt Photography (AREA)
  • Color Television Image Signal Generators (AREA)
  • Projection-Type Copiers In General (AREA)
  • Photographic Developing Apparatuses (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)
  • Heat Sensitive Colour Forming Recording (AREA)

Abstract

This invention relates to an imaging element comprising an imaging layer having associated therewith a compound of structure 1, substituents are as defined in the application. A photographic or photothermographic imaging element comprising an imaging layer having associated therewith a compound of structure 1, wherein: PUG is a photographically useful group, LINK 1 and LINK 2 are linking groups; TIME is a timing group; l is 0 or 1; m is 0, 1, or 2; n is 0 or 1; Y is C, N, O or S, X is an electron-withdrawing group; W is hydrogen, halogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or heterocyclic group, or W can combine with T or R12 to form a ring, w is 0 to 3 when Y is C, w is 0-2 when Y is N, and w is 0-1 when Y is O or S, when w is 2, the two W groups can combine to form a ring, and when w is 3, two W groups can combine to form a ring or three W groups can combine to form a bicyclic substituent; R12 is hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or heterocyclic group or R12 can combine with T to form a ring; T is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl cycloalkyl, aryl or six-membered heterocyclic group, t is 0, 1, or 2, with the proviso that if X is a sulfono group and a and l are each l and m and n are each 0, then t is 1 or 2; and if t is 2 the two T groups can combine to form a ring; X is divalent, a is 1 or 2, and b is 1; and wherein LINK 1 and LINK 2 is independently of structure II, wherein X represents carbon or sulfur; Y represents oxygen, sulfur or N-R1, where R1 is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted aryl; p is 1 or 2; Z represents carbon, oxygen or sulfur; r is 0 or 1; with the proviso that when X is carbon, both p and r are 1, when X is sulfur. Y is oxygen, p is 2 and r is 0; # denotes the bond to PUG (for LINK 1) or TIME (for LINK 2): $ denotes the bond to TIME (for LINK 1) or T(t) substituted carbon (for LINK 2).

Description

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 Α7 ‘發明說明(1) 本發明係關於含經阻斷 件,如顯影劑。 斷了用於照相之化合物之顯影元 照相技藝頃長期企圖俱應消 、 使古4 ^ ^ ' 費者照相記綠每天生活之簡 相機之感光=藉由供應含適用於手持照 帶動僅m、“ 合此需求。-旦曝光,軟片 上n ^田…力P工後才顯現之潛影。這些元件在歷史 上員精由將照相機曝光之軟片 傻 &gt; 骷史tβ #片以至少一種具有用以形成影 象又頌#鈉I顯影液處理而沖洗加工。 之色軟片需要如對胺紛或對伸苯二胺顯影劑 冷、、、:知u料影像。這些還原劑典型上存在顯影劑 錢,其後彼等於沖洗加工時被帶人曝光照相軟片元件 〈反應性相關物中。顯影劑與軟片元件隔離是需要的,因 烏將顯影劑直接摻入感光照相元件中,常導致齒化銀乳液 去感光性和不希望《朦霧。因此頃相當努力試圖生產有效 〈經阻斷顯影劑,其能夠進入_化銀乳液元件中而無不利 之去感光或朦霧效應,且在顯影狀態下去阻斷,所以顯影 劑完全不參與成像(染色或形成銀金屬)反應。 頒與利福司(Reeves)之美國專利第3,342,599號揭示使用希 呋鹼(Schiff base)顯影劑先質。在研究揭示(Resea_Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 ‘Explanation of the Invention (1) The present invention relates to a device containing a warp blocking agent, such as a developer. The development of photographic techniques for compounds used for photographing has long been attempted to eliminate the ancient photographic sensibility of the camera. Every day, the photosensitivity of the simple camera = by supplying the product suitable for hand-held photos, only m, "Meet this need.-Once exposed, the latent image that appeared on the film after the film was produced. These elements have historically been made from the film that exposed the camera. Silly &gt; It is used to form an image and is processed by processing with a sodium developer solution. The color film needs to be cooled with an amine or p-phenylenediamine developer. The reducing agent is typically developed. The developer money is subsequently exposed to photographic film elements (reactive related matter) during processing. Isolation of the developer from the film element is necessary, because the developer is directly incorporated into the photosensitive photographic element, which often causes teeth. Silver emulsion desensitization and undesired haze. Therefore, considerable efforts have been made to try to produce effective <developer by blocking, which can enter the silver emulsion element without adverse desensitization or haze effect, and in the development status Deblocking, so the developer does not participate in the imaging (staining or forming silver metal) reaction at all. US Patent No. 3,342,599 issued to Reeves discloses the use of Schiff base developer precursors. Research revealed (Resea_

DiSCl〇sure)(129 (1975)pp.27-3〇)中,希雷(Schleigh)和佛爾 (Faul)敘述彩色顯影劑之四級阻斷,和對伸苯二胺之乙酿 胺基阻斷。(所有此處參考之研究揭示係由莰尼斯馬頌出 版公司(Kenneth Mason Publications,Ltd)(督利安尼司 (Dudley Annex),12a 北街(North Street),安史渥斯 -4- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------^w- ------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) · 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(2) (Emsworth),漢雪爾(Hampshire) P010 7DQ,英國)出版 〇 ) 接著,頒與漢默卡(Hamaoka) et al·之美國專利第4,157,915 號和頒與瓦司曼(Waxman)和慕寧(Mourning)之美國專利第 4,〇60,418號敘述在用於色擴散轉移之影像接收膜中經阻斷 對伸苯二胺之製備和用途。 由於一個或多個以下問題,所有這些研究頃於實務產品 應用中失敗:經感光齒化銀去感光;不可接受之緩慢去阻 斷動力;經阻斷顯影劑之不安定性,產生朦霧提高和/或 貯存後最大密度(Dmax)降低,和缺乏簡單之釋放經阻斷顯 影劑方法。 最近阻斷和轉換化學之發展頃得到性能良好之經阻斷對 伸苯二胺。尤其,美國專利第5,019,492號中敘述具有「点_ 酮酉曰」型阻斷基(嚴格地説,爲卢―酮醯基阻斷基)之化合 物。利用/?_酮酯阻斷化學,頃變成能夠將對伸苯二胺二 一種僅當需要顯影時才變成具活性之形式顯影劑摻入 系統中。 酮醯基經阻斷顯影劑係從軟片層釋放,其中彼等係從 含雙親核劑之鹼性顯影溶液摻入,例如羥基胺。 阻==_顯影_人照相元件中,典型上係使用經 劑〈膠體明膠分散㈣行。這好散液係使用該 右;^ ^ t《万法製備’其中將顯影劑先質溶於高蒸氣壓 有機洛劑中(例如乙酩r -^ ^ , · @日)在一些案例中,與低蒸氣壓 有機ή!(如酞酸二丁酯 明膠溶液乳化。乳仆n 水性界面活性劑和 礼化後,經常以膠體研磨完成,以蒸發或 本紙張尺度“中ϋ國家標 -5- X 297公爱了 ------------------訂---------^^wii.^wi (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 A7In DiSClOsure (129 (1975) pp. 27-30), Schleigh and Faul describe the fourth-order blocking of color developers and the ethylamino group of p-phenylenediamine Blocked. (All research references referenced here are by Kenneth Mason Publications, Ltd. (Dudley Annex, 12a North Street, Answorth, 4-paper scale) Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------ ^ w- ------ Order --------- (please first Read the notes on the back and fill in this page) · 588213 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Invention Description (2) (Emsworth), published by Hampshire P010 7DQ, UK 〇) Then , US Patent No. 4,157,915 issued to Hamaoka et al. And US Patent No. 4,060,418 issued to Waxman and Mourning are described for color diffusion Preparation and use of blocked p-phenylenediamine in the transferred image receiving film. All these studies have failed in practical product applications due to one or more of the following problems: desensitization by photosensitizing silver; unacceptable slow deblocking of power; by blocking the developer's instability, producing haze and / Or reduced maximum density (Dmax) after storage, and the lack of a simple release developer blocking method. Recent developments in blocking and conversion chemistry have resulted in well-performed blocked p-phenylenediamine. In particular, U.S. Patent No. 5,019,492 describes a compound having a "dot-keto-fluorine" type blocking group (strictly speaking, a keto-fluorenyl-type blocking group). The use of /? _ Ketoester blocking chemistry has made it possible to incorporate p-phenylenediamine di into a system that becomes active only when development is needed. Ketofluorenyl groups are released from the film layer by blocking the developer, where they are incorporated from a basic developing solution containing a nucleophile, such as hydroxylamine. Resistance == _ Development_ In human photographic elements, it is typical to use the agent <colloid gelatin to disperse and walk. This good liquid dispersion uses this right; ^ ^ t "Wanfa preparation 'where the developer precursor is dissolved in a high vapor pressure organic lotion (such as acetylene r-^ ^, · @ 日) In some cases, And low vapour pressure organic price! (Such as dibutyl phthalate gelatin solution emulsified. Milky n n water-based surfactants and ceremonialization, often finished by colloidal grinding, to evaporate or this paper scale "China National Standard -5- X 297 public love ----------- order --------- ^^ wii. ^ Wi (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this (Page) 588213 A7

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 以水洗移除向蒸氣壓有機溶劑, 因此,姓絡; 如落技藝中眾所周知般。 u此,持、%需要一種成像元件和方 奴 相之簡便方六 士、甘杜絡不 / 其才疋供消費者照 咸持績需要顯影元件,尤指照相和光 :元件’其包含形式爲直到顯影都是安定之顯 凌=姑 &gt; —以加熱菽兀件和/或於該元件施加如酸之溶 洗液而開始沖洗加工’能夠迅速且易於將該 2:!:::不需要存在雙親核劑。此-顯影劑化學之 相沖、先Π:迅速沖洗加工之底片,其能夠在低成本照 相冲洗加工店中簡單且有效地沖洗加工。 同樣地,需要將其它可用㈣相之化合物掺人照相元件 中,如此彼等直到加X都保持安定,且其後迅速被釋放。 此類可用於照相之化合物包括偶合劑,染料和染料先質, 電子轉移劑等等,如以下更完整討論般。 本發明關於一種·經阻斷化合物,當熱活化時其藉由U2脱 去機制分解,而釋放可用於照相之基。在一較佳具體實施 例中’該可用於照相之基爲顯影劑。 在一個具體實施例中,熱活化較佳在約100*16(rc間之 溫度發生。在另一具體實施例中,熱活化較佳在添加酸, 驗或水之存在下,於約20和l〇(TC間之溫度發生。 本發明更關於* —種感光性照相元件,其包括支撑體和具 有經阻斷化合物之化合物,當熱活化時,該經阻斷化合物 藉由1,2脱去機制分解,而釋放可用於照相之基。 本發明更關於一種成像法,具有步驟爲:將具有經阻斷 化合物之全影像曝光照相元件熱顯影,當熱活化時,該經 -6 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) —---------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 观213 五、發明說明(4 合物藉由u脱去機制分解’釋放 而艰成顯影影'像,掃描該經顯影 ;、相(基 成第一雷早少飧主你 以像而從孩經顯影影像形 位景Μ象、/1將孩第—電子記錄數位化而形成數 存=:/周整該數位影像而形成第二電子影像表像,儲 予傳运’列印或顯示該第二t子影像表像。 本,明更關^ _種具有感光性照相元件之單次用照相 ^ ’邊兀件包括支撑體和具有經阻斷化合物之化合物,當 為活化時该化合物藉由丨,2脱去機制分解,而釋放可用於昭 相之基。 . 、…' 本發明更關於一種成像法,具有步驟爲:將具有支撑體 和經阻斷化合物之感光性照相元件全影像曝光,當在具有 加熱器之單次用照相機中熱活化時,該經阻斷化合物以i,2 脱去機制分解,而釋放可用於照相之基,並將照相機中經 曝光元件熱處理。 在一更佳具體實施例中,該照相元件包括具有與結構工之 化合物物相關之顯影層:Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. It is washed with water to remove the organic solvents that are under vapor pressure. Therefore, the family name is known; u For this reason, the need for an imaging element and Fang Nuxiang is simple and convenient. Fang Liushi, Gan Duluo Bu / the only way for consumers to develop a photo development device, especially photography and light: the element 'is included in the form Stable until the development ==> &gt; — start the processing by heating the element and / or applying a solution such as an acid solution to the element 'can be quickly and easily 2 ::::: no need There are amphiphiles. This-developer chemistry phase-first, quick-processing film, which can be processed simply and efficiently in a low-cost photo processing shop. Similarly, it is necessary to incorporate other useful compounds into the photographic element, so that they remain stable until X is added, and are then quickly released. Such photographic compounds include coupling agents, dyes and dye precursors, electron transfer agents, and the like, as discussed more fully below. The present invention relates to a blocking compound that, when thermally activated, is decomposed by a U2 removal mechanism, and releases a base that can be used for photography. In a preferred embodiment, the photographic base is a developer. In a specific embodiment, the thermal activation preferably occurs at a temperature between about 100 * 16 (rc). In another specific embodiment, the thermal activation is preferably in the presence of acid, water or water at about 20 and 10 (Temperature between TC occurs. The present invention is more about *-a photosensitive photographic element comprising a support and a compound having a blocking compound, which when thermally activated, the blocking compound is deactivated by 1, 2 The mechanism is decomposed and released, which can be used for photography. The present invention relates to an imaging method further comprising the steps of: thermally developing a full-image-exposed photographic element having a blocked compound; Paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) —--------------- Order --------- (Please read the Please fill in this page again for attention) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives 213 V. Description of the invention (4 compounds are decomposed and released into a developed image by the u removal mechanism, scan the developed image; Phase (Kicheng first Lei Shao Shaozhu Lord, you take the image and develop the image from the child development image M, / 1 will The first—electronic record is digitized to form a digital storage =: / the whole digital image is formed to form a second electronic image table, which is stored and transferred to print or display the second t-sub image table. This, Mingguanguan ^ _Single-use photography with a photosensitive photographic element ^ 'The edge element includes a support and a compound with a blocking compound. When activated, the compound is decomposed by a desorption mechanism, and the release can be used for Zhao Xiangzhi ... The present invention relates to an imaging method further comprising the steps of: exposing the entire image of a photosensitive photographic element having a support and a blocking compound, in a single-use camera with a heater When thermally activated, the blocking compound is decomposed by the i, 2 removal mechanism to release a substrate that can be used for photography and heat-treats the exposure element in the camera. In a more preferred embodiment, the photographic element includes a Structural developer related layers:

,W(w) 其中: PUG爲一種可用於照相之基; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) ^ ^ ------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(5 ) LINK 1和LINK 2爲鍵聯基; TIME爲計時基; 1爲0或1 ; m爲0,1或2 ; η爲0或1 ; Υ爲C,Ν,0或 S ; X爲經取代或未經取代之芳基或拉電子基; W爲氫,齒素或經取代或未經取代之烷基(較佳含1至6個 碳原子),環烷基(較佳含4至6個碳原子),芳基(如苯基或 莕基)或雜環基,或者W能夠結合τ或R12而形成環,當γ爲c 時w爲0至3,當Y爲N時w爲0-2,當Y爲〇或S時w爲〇_1,當 w爲2時該二個W基能夠結合而形成環,當w爲3時該二個w 基能夠結合形成環,或者該三個W基能夠結盒形成芳基或 二環取代基;, W (w) Among them: PUG is a kind that can be used for photography; This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 public love) ^ ^ ------ order ------ --- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 588213 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (5) LINK 1 and LINK 2 are key bases; TIME is the time base ; 1 is 0 or 1; m is 0, 1 or 2; η is 0 or 1; Υ is C, N, 0 or S; X is substituted or unsubstituted aryl or electron-withdrawing group; W is hydrogen Halogen or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl (preferably containing 1 to 6 carbon atoms), cycloalkyl (preferably containing 4 to 6 carbon atoms), aryl (such as phenyl or fluorenyl) Or heterocyclic group, or W can combine with τ or R12 to form a ring, w is 0 to 3 when γ is c, w is 0-2 when Y is N, and w is 0 when Y is 0 or S , When w is 2, the two W groups can be combined to form a ring, when w is 3, the two w groups can be combined to form a ring, or the three W groups can be boxed to form an aryl or bicyclic substituent;

Ru爲氫’或經取代或未經取代之烷基,環烷基,芳基或 雜環基,或者R12能夠結合T而形成環; T爲經取代或未經取代之烷基,環烷基,芳基或六元雜 環基,t爲0,1或2,限制條件爲倘若X爲氰基且n各爲 0 ’則t爲1或2 ;倘若X爲规基且a和1各爲1,且爪和η各爲〇, 貝1J t爲1或2 ;且倘若t爲2則該二個τ基能夠結合而形成環; 當X爲一價時&amp;爲1,且當x爲二價時&amp;爲1或2 ;且 當X爲一價時b爲〇,且當X爲二價時1)爲i。 各烷基較佳包含1至6個碳原子,各環烷基較佳包含4至6 個碳原子,且各芳基較佳爲苯基或萘基。 ---*--------· ------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -8 - 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(6 ) 在一本發明之較佳具體實施例中,LINK 1和LINK 2屬結 構II :Ru is hydrogen 'or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or heterocyclic group, or R12 can combine with T to form a ring; T is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, cycloalkyl , Aryl or six-membered heterocyclic group, t is 0, 1 or 2, with the limitation that if X is cyano and n is 0 'each t is 1 or 2; if X is a gauge group and a and 1 are each 1, and claw and η are each 0, 1J t is 1 or 2; and if t is 2, the two τ groups can combine to form a ring; when X is monovalent, &amp; is 1, and when x is &Amp; is 1 or 2 when bivalent; and b is 0 when X is monovalent, and 1) is i when X is bivalent. Each alkyl group preferably contains 1 to 6 carbon atoms, each cycloalkyl group preferably contains 4 to 6 carbon atoms, and each aryl group is preferably a phenyl group or a naphthyl group. --- * -------- · ------ Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -8-588213 Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by A7 B7 of the Consumer Cooperative of the Property Bureau V. Description of the Invention (6) In a preferred embodiment of the present invention, LINK 1 and LINK 2 belong to Structure II:

⑺P II $ A /⑺P II $ A /

r (z)r II 其中 X表7F碳或硫; Y表示氧,硫或N-Ri,其中I爲經取代或未經取代之烷 基,或經取代或未經取代之芳基; p爲1或2 ; Z表示碳,氧或硫; r爲0或1 ; 限制條件爲當X爲碳時,?和r皆爲1,當X爲硫時,γ爲 氧,p爲2且Γ爲〇 ; #表示鍵結於PUG (關於LINK 1)或TIME (關於LINK 2); $表示鍵結於TIME (關於LINK 1)或T⑴經取代碳(關於 LINK 2)。 圖1以塊狀圖表示一種用於處理和觀看由掃描本發明之 元件所得到成像之裝置。 圖2表示一種塊狀圖,其顯示從掃描根據本發明之顯影 彩色元件衍生載像信號冬電子信號處理。 在結構〗中,例如,PUG能夠是—種照相染料或照相試 劑。此處之照相試劑係當釋放時與照相元件内組份進一步 —·--------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -9 - 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 發明說明(7) 反應之部份。此類可用於照相之群組包括, 偶合劑,聚合物偶合劑和其它形式之偶合物劑:見:性 制Μ ’/示白促進劑’漂白抑制劑,抑制劑釋放型與:抑 染料和染料^,顯影劑(如競爭現色劑,現色’ 顯影劑先質,和南化銀顯影劑),銀離子固定劑赭 移劑,齒化銀溶劑,南化銀錯合劑,還原酮,影:調: 劑,預沖洗加工和後沖洗加工影像安定劑,硬=劑v,輮 劑,朦霧劑,紫外光輻射吸收劑,成核劑,化學和感光劑 或去感光劑,界面活性劑,和其先質和其它已知有用於照 相材料之附加物。 PUG能夠如以完成物種或先質般存在經阻斷化合物中。 例如’已完成之顯影抑制劑可以鍵結於阻斷基,或者顯影 抑制劑可以接附於計時基,其在照相材料中以特殊時間和 位置釋放。例如,PUG可以是一種已完成染料或化合物, 其在從阻斷基釋放後現色。 在本發明之較佳具體實施例中,PUG係一種顯影劑。顯 影劑能夠是一種彩色顯影劑,黑白顯影劑或交叉氧化顯影 劑。其可以包括胺酚,伸苯二胺,醌,吡唑啉二酮和畊。 説明用顯影劑係於美國專利第2,193,015,2,1〇8,243, 2,592,364,3,656,950,3,658,525,2,751,297,2,289,367, 2,772,282,2,743,279,2,753,256和 2,304,953號中敘述。 有用於作爲顯影劑之説明用PUG基爲: -10 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 x 297公釐) ^ ------tr---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)r (z) r II where X represents 7F carbon or sulfur; Y represents oxygen, sulfur or N-Ri, where I is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group; p is 1 or 2; Z represents carbon, oxygen, or sulfur; r is 0 or 1; the restriction is when X is carbon,? And r are both 1, when X is sulfur, γ is oxygen, p is 2 and Γ is 0; # indicates bonding to PUG (about LINK 1) or TIME (about LINK 2); $ means bonding to TIME ( About LINK 1) or T⑴ substituted carbon (about LINK 2). Figure 1 shows in block form an apparatus for processing and viewing the images obtained by scanning the elements of the invention. Fig. 2 shows a block diagram showing the processing of the image-bearing signal and the winter electron signal derived from scanning the developed color element according to the present invention. In the structure, for example, the PUG can be a photographic dye or a photographic reagent. The photographic reagent here is further related to the components in the photographic element when it is released --------------- Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back first (Fill in this page again.) -9-588213 The Consumer Property Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed A7 Invention Description (7) Response. Such groups that can be used for photography include, coupling agents, polymer coupling agents, and other forms of coupling agents: see: sexual bleaching inhibitors / whitening accelerators, bleach inhibitors, and inhibitor release and: Dye ^, developer (such as competitive color developer, color developer's precursor, and Nanhua silver developer), silver ion fixative migration agent, dentine silver solvent, Nanhua silver complex, reduced ketone, Shadow: agent, pre-processing and post-processing processing image stabilizer, hard = v, tincture, misting agent, ultraviolet radiation absorber, nucleating agent, chemical and photosensitizer or desensitizer, interface activity Agents, and their precursors and other additives known to be used in photographic materials. PUGs can be present in blocked compounds as complete species or precursors. For example, 'the completed development inhibitor may be bonded to a blocking group, or the development inhibitor may be attached to a timing base, which is released at a specific time and location in the photographic material. For example, PUG can be a finished dye or compound that develops color upon release from a blocking group. In a preferred embodiment of the present invention, PUG is a developer. The developer can be a color developer, a black and white developer, or a cross-oxidized developer. It may include amine phenol, phenylenediamine, quinone, pyrazoline dione, and cultivating. The developer for explanation is described in U.S. Patent Nos. 2,193,015, 2, 108,243, 2,592,364, 3,656,950, 3,658,525, 2,751,297, 2,289,367, 2,772,282, 2,743,279, 2,753,256, and 2,304,953. The PUG base used as a developer is: -10-This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (21 × 297 mm) ^ ------ tr ------- --Line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(8)588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (8)

R23 R24 ^R23 R24 ^

VNVN

CH2CH2OHCH2CH2OH

II

OH 其中 R20爲氫,自素,烷基或烷氧基; R21爲氫或燒基; . r22爲氫,烷基,烷氧基或伸烷二氧基;且 R23,R24,R25,R26和R27爲氫,烷基,輕烷基或續烷基。 -11 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) —%--------------訂--------- $4 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 588213 五、發明說明(9 ) 如上所述般,在本發明之較佳具體實施例中,link 1或 LINK 2屬結構π :OH where R20 is hydrogen, from the prime, alkyl or alkoxy; R21 is hydrogen or alkyl;. R22 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy or butanedioxy; and R23, R24, R25, R26 and R27 is hydrogen, alkyl, light alkyl or alkylene. -11-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) —% -------------- Order --------- $ 4 ( Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 588213 5. Description of the invention (9) As mentioned above, in the preferred embodiment of the present invention, link 1 or LINK 2 genus structure π:

Ρ mnMMX $ r /) (z 中 其 χ表示碳或硫; Y表不氧’硫或N_Ri,其中Ri係經取代或未經取代之烷 基或經取代或未經取代之芳基; p爲1或2 ; Z表示碳’氧或硫; r爲0或1 ; 限制條件爲當X爲碳時,P和Γ皆爲1,當χ爲硫時,γ爲 氧,ρ爲2且1*爲〇 ; #表示鍵結於PUG (關於LINK 1)或TIME (關於LINK 2); $表示鍵結於TIME (關於LINK1)或τ⑴經取代碳(關於 LINK 2)。 説明用鍵聯基包括,例如: --Sr------1—^v· ------訂---------i^wi (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 〇 II -0—C- S II -C-Ρ mnMMX $ r /) (wherein χ represents carbon or sulfur; Y represents oxo 'sulfur or N_Ri, where Ri is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group; p is 1 or 2; Z represents carbon 'oxygen or sulfur; r is 0 or 1; restrictions are that when X is carbon, P and Γ are both 1, when χ is sulfur, γ is oxygen, and ρ is 2 and 1 * 〇; # indicates bonding to PUG (about LINK 1) or TIME (about LINK 2); $ indicates bonding to TIME (about LINK 1) or τ⑴ substituted carbon (about LINK 2). Note that the bonding group includes For example: --Sr ------ 1— ^ v · ------ Order --------- i ^ wi (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Ministry of Economy Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperatives 〇II -0—C- S II -C-

S IIS II

〇 II 或 nc2h5 TIME爲計時基。此類基爲該技藝中眾所周知之基,如(1) -12- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公釐) 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 i、發明說明(i〇) 美國專利第5,262,291號中所揭示般,使用芳香族親核性取 代反應之基、;(2)使用半縮趁裂解反應之基(美國專利第 4,146,396號,日本申請案第 60-249148 ; 6 0-249149號);(3) 使用循共輛系統電子轉移反應之基(美國專利第4,4 〇 9,3 2 3 ; 4,421,845 號;日本申請案第 57-188035 ; 58-98728 ; 58- 209736 ; 58-209738號);和(4)使用分子間親核性取代反應 之基(美國專利第4,248,962號)。 説明用計時基由化學式T-1至T-4表示。〇 II or nc2h5 TIME is the timing base. This type of base is well-known in the art, such as (1) -12- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 χ 297 mm) 588213 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy A7 B7 i. Description of the invention (i) U.S. Pat. No. 5,262,291, using aromatic nucleophilicity to substitute the reaction base; (2) Using hemicondensation cleavage base (U.S. Pat. No. 4,146,396, Japanese application Nos. 60-249148; 60-249149); (3) Using the basis of the electronic transfer reaction of the car-sharing system (U.S. Patent No. 4,040,3 2 3; 4,421,845; Japanese application 57-188035; 58-98728; 58-209736; 58-209738); and (4) the use of an intermolecular nucleophilic substitution reaction group (US Patent No. 4,248,962). The timing base is represented by chemical formulas T-1 to T-4.

NuNu

E 其中:E where:

Nu爲親核基; E爲包括一個或多個談-或雜芳香族環之親電子基,包含 缺電子碳原子; LINK 3爲鍵聯基,其在Nu之親核位置和Ε中缺電子碳原 子間之直接通道中提供1至5個碳原子;且 c馬0或1。 此類計時基包括,例如:Nu is a nucleophilic group; E is an electrophilic group including one or more talk- or heteroaromatic rings, including an electron-deficient carbon atom; LINK 3 is a bonding group, which lacks electrons in the nucleophilic position of Nu and in E 1 to 5 carbon atoms are provided in a direct channel between carbon atoms; and c is 0 or 1. Such timing bases include, for example:

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) i-------— —訂--------- 線flf (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(1巧This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Fill in this page) 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (1

和 NAnd N

N 〇CH3 這些计時基於美國專利第5,262,291號中更完整敘述 、卡 其中 V表示氧原子,硫原子 T-2 或 基 R15 R13和Rm各表示氫原子或取代基; Ri5表示取代基;且d表示1或2。 Rn*RM之典型實例,當彼等表示取代基時,以及R包栝No. CH3 These timings are based on a more complete description in U.S. Patent No. 5,262,291, where V represents an oxygen atom, sulfur atom T-2 or the radicals R15, R13 and Rm each represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; Ri5 represents a substituent; Represents 1 or 2. Typical examples of Rn * RM, when they represent substituents, and R includes

RieRie

R !r-------##!! —IT-------- (請先間讀背面之注意事頊再填寫本頁〕 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ^16NCO R17R! R ------- ## !! —IT -------- (Please read the notes on the back first and then fill out this page] Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ 16NCO R17

Rl7 其中R!6表示脂肪族或芳香族烴殘基,或雜環基;Rl7表系 氫原子,脂肪族或芳香族烴殘基,或雜環基,/7Ri4和 心5各可以表示二價基,其中任二個彼此結合而=成環結 構。由化學式(T-2)表示之基之特定實例如以下所説明般。 -14- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(12) -OCH。·Rl7 where R! 6 represents an aliphatic or aromatic hydrocarbon residue, or a heterocyclic group; Rl7 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic or aromatic hydrocarbon residue, or a heterocyclic group, and each of / 7Ri4 and Xin 5 can represent a divalent Group, in which any two are combined with each other to form a ring structure. Specific examples of the base represented by the chemical formula (T-2) are as described below. -14- This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (12) -OCH. ·

-SCH一 I so2ch3-SCH-I so2ch3

with

Nul—LINK4—E1- T-3 ----------#- MW----&quot;---訂---------*· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 其中Nu 1表示親核基,氧或硫原子能夠是親核物種之實 例;E1表示親電子基,爲被Nil 1親核攻擊之基;LINK 4表 示一種鍵聯基,使Nul和E1能夠具有立體排列,所以能夠 發生分子間親核性取代反應。由化學式(T-3)表示之基之特 定實例如以下所説明。 . -15 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(13) •0Nul—LINK4—E1- T-3 ---------- #-MW ---- &quot; --- Order --------- * · (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page for further information.) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, where Nu 1 represents a nucleophilic group, and oxygen or sulfur atoms can be examples of nucleophilic species; E1 represents an electrophilic group, which is a nucleophilic attack by Nil 1 LINK 4 represents a linking group that enables Nul and E1 to have a three-dimensional arrangement, so intermolecular nucleophilic substitution reactions can occur. Specific examples of the base represented by the chemical formula (T-3) are described below. -15 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (13) • 0

,ch2nco—— C3H7(i), ch2nco-C3H7 (i)

CO2C4H9 -O oCO2C4H9 -O o

ΟII -ocΟII -oc

N—CO—— o oII II -OC《CH2) 2^C-N—CO—— o oII II -OC 《CH2) 2 ^ C-

NC0—— CH(CH3&gt;2 CH (CH3) 2NC0—— CH (CH3 &gt; 2 CH (CH3) 2

V 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 (k13)x (ftl4)y 其中V,R13,R14和d之韋義全部分別與化學式(T-2)中相 同。此外,R13和R14可以接合一起而形成苯環或雜環,或 者V可以與R13或R14接合而形成苯或雜環。21和义2各獨立表 -16 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) —-----------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(14) 示碳原子或氮原子,X和y各表示0或1 計時基(T-4)之特定實例如以下説明V Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (k13) x (ftl4) y where V, R13, R14, and d are all the same as in chemical formula (T-2). In addition, R13 and R14 may be joined together to form a benzene ring or heterocyclic ring, or V may be joined to R13 or R14 to form a benzene or heterocyclic ring. 21 and Yi 2 each independent table-16 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) --------------------- Order --- ------ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (14) shows carbon or nitrogen atom, X and y each represent 0 or 1 timing base (T-4 The specific examples are as follows

-0. CH-0. CH

CHu—NCHu—N

NHCOCH Η 3NHCOCH Η 3

co2hco2h

-0 CHr CH〇 N-0 CHr CH〇 N

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

n&quot; 、CNn &quot;, CN

—*--------------- —訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(15)— * --------------- —Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to Chinese National Standards (CNS ) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (15)

0 Μ0 Μ

ch5ch5

ch5 ο οch5 ο ο

ch2ch2

Η ,ch2—Η, ch2—

ΚΙ -CHΚΙ -CH

Ν〆 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 Ο CHrΝ〆 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Ο CHr

c11h23 尤其較佳可用於照相之化合物係屬結構III之經阻斷顯影 劑: -18 - —· ^-------—i^w— —I—訂---------i^wi (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 B7c11h23 Particularly preferred compounds that can be used in photography are blocked developers of structure III: -18-— · ^ ----------- i ^ w— —I—Order -------- -i ^ wi (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7 B7

,W(w) 五、發明說明(16 其中: 、Z爲、0H或NR2R3 ’其中汉2和獨立爲氫或經取代或未經取 代之烷基,或者&amp;和連接而形成環; 、Rs ’ &amp; ’ &amp;和Rs獨立爲氫,鹵素,羥基,胺基,烷氧基, 羰醯胺基,磺醯胺基,烷磺醯胺基或烷基,或者&amp;能夠與 I或R6連接,或R0和/或能夠聯接於心或心而形成環; T爲經取代或未經取代之烷基,環烷基,芳基或六元雜 環族基,t爲0, 1或2,限制條件爲倘若χ爲氰基且m*n各爲 〇,貝lit爲1或2,·倘若X爲砜基且&amp;和丨各爲丨,且m*n各爲 則t爲1或2 ;且倘若t爲2,則二個T基能夠結合而形成環;W (w) V. Description of the invention (16 where: Z is, 0H or NR2R3 'where Han 2 and independently is hydrogen or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, or &amp; and connected to form a ring; Rs '&amp;' &amp; and Rs are independently hydrogen, halogen, hydroxy, amine, alkoxy, carbonylamido, sulfoamido, sulfoamido, or alkyl, or &amp; capable of interacting with I or R6 Link, or R0 and / or can be linked to the heart or the heart to form a ring; T is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or six-membered heterocyclic group, t is 0, 1 or 2 The restriction is that if χ is cyano and m * n is 0, belit is 1 or 2, if X is sulfone and &amp; and 丨 are each 丨, and m * n are each t or 1 or 2 And if t is 2, two T groups can be combined to form a ring;

Rn爲氫’或經取代或未經取代之烷基,環烷基,芳基或 雜環基,或者R12能夠與T或W結合而形成環; X爲經取代或未經取代之芳基或拉電子基; Y爲 C,N,Ο或 S ; 當X爲一價時a爲1,當X爲二價時a爲1或2 ; 當X爲一價時b爲0,當X爲二價時b爲1 ; W爲氫,齒素,或經取代或未經取代之燒基,環垸基, 芳基或雜環基,或者W能夠與T結合而形成環,當丫爲(:時 w爲〇至3,當Y爲N時w爲0-2,當Y爲Ο或S時w爲〇-1,當… 19 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) —U----------------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 588213 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(17 ) ,2時,二個W基能夠結合而形成環,當〜爲3時,二個w基 能夠結合而形成環,或者三個w基能夠結合而形成芳基或 二環取代基。 可用於結構I和ΙΠ之化合物之雜環族基較佳爲包含一個或 多個雜原子之5-或6-元雜環,如N,0,S或Se。此類基包 括例如經取代或未經取代之苯並咪唑基,苯並p塞唑基,苯 並違吩基,苯並咬喃基,吱喃基,啕p朵基,異峻琳基,異 噻唑基,異噚唑基,嘮唑基,甲吡啶基,嘌呤基,哌喃 基’咐17井基’ p比峻基,IT比淀基,喊淀基,p比洛基,甲p奎琳 基,峻哇琳基,P查淋基,4喏琳基,四峻基,違二唾基, 魂二唆基’苯硫基和三U坐基。 當在本申請書中之參考資料係爲專某一特殊部份或基 時’此表示該邵份本身可以是未經取代或經一個或多個取 代基取代(達可能之最大數目)。例如,「烷基」表示一種 經取代或未經取代之烷基,而「芳基J表示一種經取代或 未經取代之苯(具有達5個取代基)或更高碳芳香族系統。通 苇’除非特別指出’此處可用於分子上之取代基包括任何 基,無論經取代或未經取代,其不會破壞照相用途需要之 性質。任何所述基上之取代基實例能夠包括已知之取代 基,如:_素,例如,氣基,氟基,溴基,碘基;烷氧 基’尤指「較低碳燒基」(即具1至6個碳原子),例如,甲 氧基,乙氧基;經取代或未經取代之烷基,尤指較低碳貌 基(例如,甲基,三氟甲基);硫燒基(例如,甲硫基或乙硫 基)’尤指具1至6個碳原子者;經取代和未經取代之芳基, 尤指具有6至2 0個碳原子者(例如苯基);和經取代或未經取 代之雜芳基,尤指具含1至3個擇自N,〇或s雜原子之5或6- -20 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ^---------------^--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製Rn is hydrogen 'or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or heterocyclic group, or R12 can combine with T or W to form a ring; X is a substituted or unsubstituted aryl or Electron radical; Y is C, N, 0 or S; a is 1 when X is monovalent, a is 1 or 2 when X is divalent; b is 0 when X is monovalent, and X is two when X is monovalent When valence, b is 1; W is hydrogen, halogen, or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, cyclofluorenyl, aryl or heterocyclic group, or W can combine with T to form a ring, when y is (: When w is 0 to 3, when Y is N, w is 0-2, when Y is 0 or S, w is 0-1, when ... 19 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) Mm) —U ---------------- Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Employees of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Consumer Cooperative 588213 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the Invention (17) At 2 o'clock, two W bases can be combined to form a ring. When ~ 3, two w bases can be combined. Instead, a ring is formed, or three w groups can be combined to form an aryl or bicyclic substituent. The heterocyclic group for the compounds of structures I and III is preferably a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclic ring containing one or more heteroatoms such as N, 0, S or Se. Such groups include, for example, substituted or Unsubstituted benzimidazolyl, benzopazolyl, benzophenylenyl, benzopyranyl, sulfanyl, pyridoxyl, isomerinyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolyl , Oxazolyl, mepyridyl, purinyl, piperanyl 'report 17 wells' p ratio base, IT ratio base, p-blocyl, methyl p quelinyl, junwalinyl , P Chalyn, 4 喏 基 , 基, 4 基 基 基, 违 唾 唾 唾 基, 违 唆 唆 '' '' thio and 三 U 基 坐. When the reference material in this application is a special department "This means that the moiety itself may be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more substituents (up to the maximum number possible). For example," alkyl "means a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl And "Aryl J represents a substituted or unsubstituted benzene (with up to 5 substituents) or higher carbon aromatic systems. Tong Wei 'unless specifically noted' can be used here on molecules The substituents include any group, whether substituted or unsubstituted, which will not destroy the properties required for photographic use. Examples of the substituents on any of the groups can include known substituents, such as: , Fluoro, bromo, iodo; alkoxy, especially "lower carbon alkyl" (ie, having 1 to 6 carbon atoms), for example, methoxy, ethoxy; substituted or unsubstituted Alkyl, especially lower carbon (eg, methyl, trifluoromethyl); thioalkyl (eg, methylthio or ethylthio) ', especially those having 1 to 6 carbon atoms; Substituted and unsubstituted aryl groups, especially those having 6 to 20 carbon atoms (such as phenyl); and substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl groups, especially those containing 1 to 3 optional N, 〇 or s 5-5 or 6-20 of heteroatoms This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ^ --------------- ^- ------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) 588213 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

-21 - 五、發明說明(1S) 疋裱(例如,吡啶基,塞吩基,呋喃基,吡咯基);如任 以下所述之酸或酸鹽基;和其它該技藝中已知者。燒基j 代基可以更明確地包括Γ較低碳烷基」(即具有原 子),例如,甲基,乙基等等。此外,關於任何烷基或伸 燒基,推斷這些能夠是分枝,未分枝或環族。 以下爲用於本發明可用於照相之化合物之代表性實例:-21-V. Description of the invention (1S) fluorene (for example, pyridyl, sephenyl, furyl, pyrrolyl); acid or acid salt groups as described below; and others known in the art. Alkenyl group j may more specifically include Γ lower-carbon alkyl groups (ie, having an atom), such as methyl, ethyl, and the like. In addition, with regard to any alkyl or alkynyl group, it is inferred that these can be branched, unbranched, or cyclic. The following are representative examples of compounds that can be used for photography in the present invention:

,Ν、 D-2 D-3 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) —卜---------^w&gt; ------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(19 4 D-, N, D-2 D-3 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) —Bu --------- ^ w &gt; ------ Order- -------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (19 4 D-

N D- D-N D- D-

---^---------^w— ------訂 --------^^^1 .^w— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製--- ^ --------- ^ w-- ------ Order -------- ^^^ 1. ^ w— (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this Page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

οο

N 22 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7N 22 This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7

(請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) i^w. -------訂---------^^1 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(21 D-12(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) i ^ w. ------- Order ------ --- ^^ 1 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (21 D-12

D-13 ΟD-13 Ο

D-14D-14

Ο 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 D-15 0H、人'、N 0〇 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs D-15 0H, person ', N 0

-24- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 〇II,s、 —.---------------訂--------- i丨· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(22 ) ο D--24- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 〇II, s, —.--------------- Order ----- ---- i 丨 · (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (22) ο D-

οο

C// o\\C // o \\

N D-N D-

D-D-

ο ---------1 —------tr----------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 D-ο --------- 1 ------- tr ----------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Staff Consumption of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Cooperative printed D-

N 25 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(23 ) Ο Ο W// ,s. D-20 N 0N 25 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (23) Ο Ο W //, s. D-20 N 0

also

0 D-21 N 00 D-21 N 0

A (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) D-22 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 D-23 N 0A (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) D-22 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs D-23 N 0

Ν ΟΝ Ο

-26- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) S\^0ο-26- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) S \ ^ 0ο

ο II -Ν、 Ν— .!丨!丨訂-!!丨丨· 588213 A7 B7 明說 明發 24ο II -Ν, Ν—.! 丨!丨 Order- !! 丨 丨 · 588213 A7 B7 Instructions Mingfa 24

N〇2N〇2

H、人〜 N〇2H, person ~ N〇2

ο ο \\// (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製ο ο \\ // (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

,Ν〇2 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(25) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製, 〇2 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (25) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

-28- ----------------訂- ------I .^w (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(26 ) D-33 D-34-28- ---------------- Order- ------ I. ^ W (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (26) D-33 D-34

cf3cf3

CN ,Ν、 D-35CN, Ν, D-35

w οw ο

ΎΎ

CN cTo D-36CN cTo D-36

Cl N〇2 -----------—I—訂·--------i^w. (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 D-37 D-38Cl N〇2 -----------— I—Order · -------- i ^ w. (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by employee consumer cooperative D-37 D-38

O n 〇 〇 Ϋ) 〇〇 T H //.O n 〇 〇 Ϋ) 〇〇 T H //.

oo

H /? 會录、 O -29- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) 588213 五、發明說明(27) D-39H /? Proceedings, O -29- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) 588213 5. Description of the invention (27) D-39

〇 h、nA〇 h, nA

Jii S一 s〆 II II 〇 人Jii S-s〆 II II 〇 person

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 該經阻斷顯影劑較佳摻入一 中。娣阻鼢翩旦,七 禋次夕種顯#兀件之顯影^ 甲、、工阻辦顯影劑之用量在久浪★士 a 、 00^5,,. . v』重在各添加炙層中之用量較佳肩 •至5克/千万公尺,更佳〇1至2克/平方公尺 2克/平方公尺。這些可以是 取住 •牛之成色或非成色層。經pj 斷顯影劑能夠包含於在沖、冰士 τ ^ …1 一 ^ a 匕σ於在冲洗加工期間接觸照相元件之分離 凡件中。 在顯影元件全影像曝光後,經阻斷顯影劑在顯影元件沖 洗加工期間,藉由沖洗液中酸或驗之存在,在顯影元件沖 洗加工期間加熱顯影元件’和/或在沖洗加工期間將顯影 π件與如層合薄張之分離元件接觸而活化。該層合薄張視 需要可以包含額外之沖洗加工化學物,如研究揭示之χιχ 和XX章節,1996年9月,第389號,第38957項所揭示般(以 下參照爲(「研究揭示I」))。此處參考之章節爲研究揭示工 之章節,除非特別指出。此類化學物包括例如亞硫酸鹽, 羥基胺,異羥圬酸,和類似物,抗朦霧劑,如鹼金屬南化 物,含氮雜環化合物,和類似物,如有機酸之螯隔劑,和 其它添加劑,如緩衝劑,磺化聚苯乙晞,著色還原劑,生 物酸,除銀劑,安定劑和類似物。 經阻斷化合物可以用於任何形式照相系統中。一種有用 於本發明實務之代表性彩色負片結構係由以下元件SCN-i 訂---------#· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 30- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 發明說明(28 明:Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The blocked developer is preferably incorporated into one.娣 Blocking and smashing, seven 禋 次 夕 种 显 # 兀 件 的 之 ^^ The amount of developer used in Jiulang, Shizhuang a, 00 ^ 5 ,, .. v "focuses on the addition of each layer The dosage is preferably from shoulder to 5 g / million, more preferably from 1-2 g / m2 to 2 g / m2. These can be taken up • Pigmented or non-colored layers. The pj-broken developer can be included in the process of processing and separating τ ^ ^ ^ 1 ^ a ^ σ from contact with the photographic element during processing. After the full image of the developing element is exposed, the developer is blocked during the developing element washing process, by heating the developing element during the developing element washing process, and / or developing The π member is activated by contact with a separation element such as a laminated sheet. This laminated sheet may contain additional processing chemicals as required, as disclosed in Chapters χ and XX of the Research Reveal, September 1996, No. 389, Item 38957 (refer to the following as "Research Reveal I" )). The chapters referenced here are those for research revealing, unless otherwise specified. Such chemicals include, for example, sulfites, hydroxylamines, isohydroxy acids, and the like, anti-mist agents such as alkali metal south compounds, nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds, and the like, such as chelating agents for organic acids , And other additives, such as buffering agents, sulfonated polyphenylenesulfonium, coloring reducing agents, biological acids, silver removal agents, stabilizers and the like. Blocked compounds can be used in any form of photographic system. A typical color negative film structure used in the practice of the present invention is ordered by the following components SCN-i --------- # · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 30- This paper size applies China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) 588213 The Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs's Consumer Cooperative publishes the invention description (28):

支撑體s能夠是反射性或透明,其經常較佳。當爲反射 性時,支撑體爲白色,能夠採用任何彩色茚片元件中最近 常用之傳統支撑體形式。當支撑體爲透明時,其能夠是= 色或經染色,能夠採用彩色負片元件中最近常用之傳統支 撑體形式-例如,無色或經染色透明軟片支撑體。支撑結 構細節於該技藝中眾所周知。有用之支撑體實例爲聚 晞縮醛)薄膜,聚苯乙晞薄膜,聚(對酞酸伸乙酯)薄膜,聚 (茶酸伸乙醋)薄膜,聚碳酸酯薄膜,和相關之樹脂材料, 以及紙,布,玻璃,金屬,和其它承受預期沖洗加工環境 之支撑體。該元件能夠包含額外層,如濾光層,内層,覆 蓋層’次層’抗暈染層和類似物。透明和反射性支撑體結 構,包括提高黏性之次層,係於研究揭示ί第XV章節中揭 示〇 -31 - 私紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ---^----------------tr--------- f請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 五、發明說明(29 ) 本發明之照相元件亦可以有用地包括如1992年η月之研 究揭示,第34390項中揭示之磁性記綠材料,或透明磁記 錄層’如在透明支撑體底面上包含磁性顆粒之層,如美國 專利第4,279,945號和美國專利第4,3〇2,523號。 藍色’綠色和紅色記錄層單元BU,GU和RU中各由一種 或多種親水性膠體層形成,且包含這少一種輻射感光性商 化銀乳液和偶合劑,包括至少一種染料成像偶合劑。較佳 綠色和紅色記錄層單元經細分爲至少二個記錄層次單元, 以提供記錄寬容度提高和影像粒度降低。在最簡單之預期 結構中’各層單元或層次單元係由含乳液和偶合劑之單一 親水性膠體層組成。當層單元或層次單元中存在之偶合劑 經塗佈除含乳液層外之親水性性膠體層時,含偶合劑親水 性膠f豆層係經疋位以接受顯影期間來自乳液之經氧化彩色 顯影劑。含偶合劑層經常爲緊鄰含乳液層之親水性膠體 層。 爲了確保優良影像銳度,並幫助照相機之製造和使用, 全部感光層較佳定位於支撑體共同面上。當爲捲片軸形式 時,元件將經纏繞於軸上,所以當於照相機中被解開時, 曝光之光線在撞擊帶動這些層之支撑體前便先撞擊全部感 光層。此外,爲了確保曝光於元件上影像之優良銳度,^ 撑體上層單元之總厚度應該受控制。通常,支撑體曝光面 上感光層,内層和保護層之總厚度應該低於35微米。 傳統輻射感光性_化銀乳液中任何方便選擇皆能夠接入 層單元中,並用以提供本發明之光譜吸收。最常使用本,卜 -32 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) --^^1 ------^-------I i^w. (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(3〇) 匕物〈高度溴化物乳液。爲了實現較高沖洗加工速 =,能夠使用高度氣化物乳液。輕射感光性氣化銀,漠化 以琪:臭,銀’碘氯化銀’氯溴化銀,漠氣化銀,換氣化 則“、'臭氯化銀粒子皆被涵蓋。該粒子能夠是規則或不規 /。列如平片狀)。全郅粒子凸起面積中平片狀顆粒佔至少 =(較佳至少70%,最佳至少9。%)尤其有利於提高關於 叔度〈速度。經仔細考慮,平片狀顆粒需要二個主平行 面,其等圓直徑(ECD)與其厚度比爲至少2。更明確地,較 :〈平片狀顆粒乳液係具有平片狀顆粒長寬比爲至少5 ^最佳大於8。較佳之平均平片狀顆粒厚度爲低於〇3微 K取佳低於0.2微米)。尤其包括平均平片狀顆粒厚度低於 訂, 〇.〇7微米之超薄平片狀顆粒乳液。該顆粒較佳形成表面潛 影:所以當於本發明之彩色負片形式之表面顯影劑沖洗加 工時,便產生負像。 傳統輻射感光性南化銀乳液係由以上例舉之研究揭示卜 I.礼液顆粒和其製備提供。乳液之化學感光,其能夠採用 任何形式’係於化學感光章節以中説明。有用於作爲化學 感光劑之化合物’例如’包括活性明膠,硫,硒,碲, 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 金,舶,鈀’銦,餓,鍊’磷,或其結合物。化學感光通 常在pAg爲5至10, pH爲4至8,溫度爲3〇至紙進行。光迷 感光和感光染料’其能夠採取任何形式,係由章節ν·光‘ 感光和去感光説明。染料可以在乳液塗佈於照相元件前‘ 任何時間(例如化學感光前後)或同—時間添加於由化銀顆 粒和親水性膠體之乳液。例如’染科可以在水或醇中之溶 -33- 本紙張尺度適用中關家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公f 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 五、發明說明(31 ) 液般或如固體顆粒之分散液般添加。乳液層典型上亦包括 一種或多種抗朦霧劑或安定劑,其可以採用任何傳統形 式,如章節VII歐抗朦霧劑和安定劑所説明般。 ’ 用於本發明之齒化銀顆粒可以根據該技藝中已知之方法 製備,如以上例舉之研究揭示!,和傑姆斯(James)之照相 法原理(Theory 〇f the Photographic process)中所述者。這些 包括如氨性乳液製法,中性或酸性乳液製法,和該技蓺中 已知者。這些方法通常包括在保護性膠體存在下,將二溶 性銀鹽與水落性卣化物鹽混合,並在以沉澱形成_化銀期 間將溫度’ pAg,pH値等等控制於適當値。 在顆粒沉澱期間,能夠摻入一種或或多種添補劑(除銀和 鹵化物外之顆粒吸藏)而調整顆粒性質。例如,本發明之 乳液中能夠存在任何研究研究揭示j章節T•乳液顆粒^其製 備,次章節G·顆粒調整條件和調整,第(3),(4)和(5)段中 揭示之各種傳統添補劑。此外,更明確地包括以包含一種 或多種有機配位子之過渡金屬六配位錯合物添補該顆粒, 如臥姆(01m) et al·之美國專利第5,36〇,712號所敎導般。 更明確地包括將一種能夠以形成淺電子阱(以下亦參照爲 SET)提高映像速度之添補劑參混顆粒之面向中心立體晶 格,如1994年11月出版之研究揭示第36736項中所討論般。 SET添補劑於顆粒内任合位置皆有效。通常當set添補劑 係參混顆粒之50%外時,以銀爲基礎,得到較佳結果。最 佳參混SET顆粒區域係由形成顆粒之全部銀的咒至85%銀 形成者。SET能夠同時或在持續顆粒沉澱期間摻入容器 ·· -------訂--------- {請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) •34- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 588213 五、發明說明(32 中通4 Φ成SET之添補劑係以至少每莫耳銀1χ1〇·7莫耳至 其'合解度極限之濃度參混,典型上達約每莫耳銀約5xl〇·4 莫耳。 SET添補劑已知對於降低相互性破壞。尤其,使用鋼六 配位錯^物或Ir+4錯合物作爲set添補劑是有利的。 、有效提供淺電子醉之銦添補劑(非SET添補劑)亦能夠參混 於,化銀顆粒乳液之顆粒中,以降低相互性破壞。 為了有效於相互性改良,銦能夠存在於顆粒結構内任何 位置。對^鋼添補劑產生相互性改良之顆粒結構内較佳位 置田係在最初6,〇秒後和沉澱最後1%形成顆粒之銀前(最佳 在最後3 /〇則)所形成之顆粒區域内。添補劑能夠同時參混 或在持續顆粒沉澱期間摻入容器中。通常相互改良性非 SET Ir添補劑係以其最低有效濃度參混。 、〃、相元件之對比能夠藉由以含亞硝醯基或硫亞硝醯基配 位子(NZ添補劑)之六配位錯合物添補該顆粒而提高,如麥 克道格(=DUgle)之美國專利第七933,272號中所揭示般。 對比提高之添補劑能夠在任何合宜位置參混於顆粒社構 中。然而,倘若NZ添補劑係存在顆粒表面,則能夠降低顆 粒I感光性。因而較佳Nz添補劑係位於顆粒内,所以其藉 由在形成碘氣化銀顆粒時沉澱所有沉澱之銀之至少ι% (最 佳至少3%)而與顆粒表面分離。\2添補劑之較佳之對比提 高濃度係介於在每莫耳銀卜1〇-11至打1〇-8莫耳範圍内,尤 其較佳之濃度在每莫耳銀⑺七至^8莫耳範園内。 雖然各種SET,非SET Ir和NZ添補劑之_般較佳濃度範 :· -------訂---------丨· (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -35 588213 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(34) 而任何有用K感光性銀,如_化銀,能夠於有用於本 :明之元件中使用,較佳總量低於1〇克/平方公尺銀。銀 I較佳低於7克/平方公尺,銀量低於5克/平方公尺甚至更 佳。改良元件光學之銀量較低,所以能夠使用該元件產生 更銳利之圖像。這些較低量銀更加重要處在於使元件能夠 迅速顯影並去除銀。相反地,對於實現曝光寬容度至少2.7 l〇gE,一方面對於欲放大之圖像維持充份低之粒度位置需 要每平方公尺支撑體表面積至少1·5克塗佈銀之銀塗層覆 蓋。 BU包含至少一種黃色染料成像偶合劑,〇υ包含至少一 種紫紅色染料成像偶合劑,RU包含至少一種青色染料成像 偶合劑。能夠使用任何傳統染料成像偶合劑之合宜結合 物。傳統染料成像偶合劑係由以上例舉之研究揭示I,X染 料成像劑和調整劑’ Β·形成影像-染料偶合劑説明。照相元 件可以更包含其它影像調整化合物,如「顯影抑制劑-釋 放型」化合物(DIR)。有用於本發明元件之更多dir,該技 藝中已知,以及實例係於美國專利第3,137,578 ; 3^48,022 3,148,062 ; 3,227,554 ; 3,384,657 ; 3,379,529 ; 3,615,506 3,617,291 ; 3,620,746 ; 3,701,783 ; 3,733,201 ; 4,049,455 4,095,984 ; 4,126,459 ; 4,149,886 ; 4,150,228 ; 4,211,562 4,248,962 ; 4,259,437 ; 4,362,878 ; 4,409,323 ; 4,477,563 4,783,012 ; 4,962,018 ; 4,500,634 ; 4,579,816 ; 4,607,004 4,618,571 ; 4,678,739 ; 4,746,600 ; 4,746,601 ; 4,791,049 4,857,447 ; 4,865,959 ; 4,880,342 ; 4,886,736 ; 4,937,179 -37- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------ 訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(35) 4,946,767 ; 4,948,716 ; 4,952,485 ; 4,956,269 ; 4,959,299 ; 4,966,835 ; 4,985,336號,以及專利公告德國專利第GB 1,560,240 ; GB 2,007,662 ; GB 2,032,914 ; GB 2,099,167號; 第 DE 2,842,063 ; DE 2,937,127 ; DE 3,636,824 ; DE 3,644,416號,以及以下歐洲專利公告第272,573;335,319; 336,411 ; 346,899 ; 362,870 ; 365,252 ; 365,346 ; 373,382 ; 376,212 ; 377,463 ; 378,236 ; 384,670 ; 396,486 ; 401,612 ; 401,613號中敘述。 DIR化合物亦揭示於「彩色照相術用顯影劑-抑制劑-釋放 (DIR)偶合劑」,C. R.巴爾(Barr),J.R·特多(Thirtle)和 P· W.威騰(Vittum) ’ 照相科學和工程(photographic Science and Engineering),第 13册,第 174 頁(1969)。 於單一染料成像層單元内塗佈一種,二種或三種史JMLc 液層是常見實務。當於單一層單元内塗佈二層或多層乳液 層時,其典型上經選擇以區分感光性。當較高感光性乳液 塗佈於較低感光性乳液上時,得到之速度較當二種乳液係 參混時快。當較低感光性乳液塗佈於較高感光性乳液上 時,得到之對比較當二種乳液係參混時高。較佳最具感光 性之乳液係位於最靠近曝光輻射來源處,最低之乳液係位 於最接近支撑體處。 一個或多個本發明之層單元較佳經細分爲至少二個,更 佳三個或多個次單元層。較佳在彩色記錄單元中所有感光 性鹵化銀乳液,在相同可見光譜區中皆具有光譜感光性。 在此具體實施例中,當單元中捧混之卣化銀乳液具有根據 -38- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------------tr---------^^丨# (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 五、發明說明(36) 本發明之光譜吸收時,預期彼等之間對於光譜吸收具有少 4差異。在依然更佳之具體實施例中,較緩慢齒化銀乳液 之感光性明確地經調整,以説明存在其上之層單元中較快 速鹵化銀乳液之光屏蔽效應,以便隨著曝光從低改變至高 光度而藉由照相記綠材料提供全影像均勻光譜回應。因而 在經細分層單元之較緩慢乳液中,可能希望較高比例之尖 峰光吸收光譜感光性染料説明下層光譜感光性之尖峰上屏 蔽和放寬。 内層IL1和IL2係具有作爲其主要機能色彩污染降低之親 水性層-即避免經氧化顯影劑在與現色偶合劑反應前移動 至鄰近記錄層單元。内層藉由提高經氧化顯影劑必需行經 之擴散路徑長度而多少簡單有效。爲了提高内層攔截經氧 化顯影劑之效率,傳統實務係摻混經氧化顯影劑。抗污劑 (經氧化顯影劑消化劑)能夠從研究揭示卜χ•染料成形劑和 調整劑,D·胡(Hue)調整劑/安定化,第⑺段所揭示者選 擇。當GU和RU中一種或多種_化銀乳液爲高溴化物乳 液,且因此對於藍光具有明顯負感光性時,較佳在ili中 參混一黃色濾鏡,如卡利李(Carey Lea)銀或黃色沖洗液可 脱色染料。適當黃色濾光染料能夠從研究揭,章節νιπ. 吸收和散射材料,Β·吸收材料中説明者選擇。在案例發明 之元件中’紫紅染色滤光材料缺少IL2和ru。 抗暈染層單元AHU典型上包含沖洗液可移除或可脱色光 吸收材料,如一種色素和染料或其結合物。適當材料能夠 從研究揭示I,章節VIII·吸收材料中所揭示者選擇。^Hu -39- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -------訂--------- 588213 A7The support s can be reflective or transparent, which is often preferred. When reflective, the support is white and can take the form of a conventional support recently used in any color indene element. When the support is transparent, it can be colored or stained, and can take the form of a traditional support recently used in color negative elements-for example, a colorless or stained transparent film support. Details of the support structure are well known in the art. Examples of useful supports are polyacetal) films, polystyrene films, poly (ethyl terephthalate) films, poly (ethoxylate) films, polycarbonate films, and related resin materials , And paper, cloth, glass, metal, and other supports that withstand the intended processing environment. The element can contain additional layers, such as a filter layer, an inner layer, a cover layer ' sublayer ' anti-blooming layer and the like. Transparent and reflective support structure, including sublayers that increase viscosity, are revealed in the research reveal, Chapter XV. 〇-31-Private paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)- -^ ---------------- tr --------- f Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page} 588213 Employees ’Consumption of Intellectual Property, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the cooperative A7 V. Description of the invention (29) The photographic element of the present invention may also usefully include the magnetic green material disclosed in the research of η in 1992, Item 34390, or the transparent magnetic recording layer 'as in transparent A layer containing magnetic particles on the bottom surface of the support, such as US Patent No. 4,279,945 and US Patent No. 4,302,523. Each of the blue 'green and red recording layer units BU, GU, and RU is formed of one or more hydrophilic colloid layers, and contains the less one radiation-sensitive commercial silver emulsion and a coupling agent, including at least one dye imaging coupling agent. The preferred green and red recording layer units are subdivided into at least two recording layer units to provide increased recording latitude and reduced image granularity. In the simplest expected structure, the 'layer units or layer units' consist of a single hydrophilic colloidal layer containing an emulsion and a coupling agent. When a coupling agent present in a layer unit or a layered unit is coated with a hydrophilic colloid layer other than the emulsion-containing layer, the coupling agent-containing hydrophilic gum layer is positioned to accept the oxidized color from the emulsion during development Developer. The coupling agent-containing layer is often a hydrophilic colloid layer next to the emulsion-containing layer. In order to ensure excellent image sharpness and help the manufacture and use of the camera, all the photosensitive layers are preferably positioned on the common surface of the support. When in the form of a reel, the element will be wound on the shaft, so when unwound in the camera, the exposed light strikes all the light-sensitive layers before impacting the support that drives these layers. In addition, in order to ensure excellent sharpness of the image exposed on the element, the total thickness of the upper layer unit of the support should be controlled. Generally, the total thickness of the photosensitive layer, inner layer and protective layer on the exposed surface of the support should be less than 35 microns. Any convenient option in the conventional radiation-sensitive silver emulsion can be incorporated into the layer unit and used to provide the spectral absorption of the present invention. Most commonly used, Bu-32 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 public love)-^^ 1 ------ ^ ------- I i ^ w (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (30) Dagger <High bromide emulsion. To achieve higher processing speeds, highly gaseous emulsions can be used. Light shot of light-sensitive silver gasification, desertification to Qi: stinky, silver 'silver iodide chloride' silver chlorobromide, gasification of silver, gasification, and 'odorous silver chloride particles are covered. The particles It can be regular or irregular /. The column is like a flat plate). The flat plate particles occupy at least = (preferably at least 70%, most preferably at least 9.%) in the raised area of the whole particle. It is particularly beneficial to improve the degree <Speed. After careful consideration, flat plate-like particles need two main parallel planes, and the ratio of their equal circle diameter (ECD) to their thickness is at least 2. More specifically, compared to: <Flat plate-like particle emulsions have flat plate-like particles The aspect ratio is at least 5 ^, preferably greater than 8. The preferred average flat plate-like particle thickness is less than 0.3 μK, preferably less than 0.2 micron.) In particular, the average flat plate-like particle thickness is less than the order, 〇.〇 7 micron ultra-thin flat plate-like particle emulsion. The particles preferably form a surface latent image: so when the surface developer in the form of the color negative film of the present invention is processed, a negative image is produced. Traditional radiation-sensitive silverized silver emulsion It is revealed by the researches exemplified above. I. Liye granules and preparation thereof. Photosensitivity, which can take any form, as described in the Chemical Photosensitivity section. There are compounds used as chemical photosensitizers, such as' including active gelatin, sulfur, selenium, tellurium, gold printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Ship, palladium 'indium, starved, chain' phosphorus, or a combination thereof. Chemical photosensitivity is usually carried out at a pAg of 5 to 10, a pH of 4 to 8, and a temperature of 30 to paper. Photosensitivity and photosensitive dyes' which can It takes any form and is described in chapter ν · Light 'Photosensitivity and Desensitization. Dyes can be added at any time (for example, before and after chemical photosensitivity) before emulsion coating on photographic elements, or at the same time, by adding silver particles and hydrophilic colloids. Emulsion. For example, “Dyestuff can be dissolved in water or alcohol -33- This paper size is applicable to Zhongguanjia Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public f 588213) Printed by A7, Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs 2. Description of the invention (31) It is added as a liquid or as a dispersion of solid particles. The emulsion layer typically also includes one or more anti-hazing agents or stabilizers, which can adopt any traditional form Formula, as described in Section VII European Anti-Misting Agents and Stabilizers. 'The dentine silver particles used in the present invention can be prepared according to methods known in the art, as revealed by the research exemplified above, and James (James) as described in the Theory of the Photographic process. These include, for example, ammonia-based emulsions, neutral or acidic emulsions, and those known in the art. These methods are usually included in protection In the presence of colloidal colloids, the bis-soluble silver salt is mixed with the water-falling halide salt, and the temperature 'pAg, pH 値, etc. are controlled to appropriate 期间 during the formation of silver ions by precipitation. During the particle precipitation, one can be incorporated Or one or more supplements (particle occlusion other than silver and halide) to adjust the particle properties. For example, there can be any research in the emulsion of the present invention revealing chapter T • emulsion particles ^ its preparation, subchapter G · particle adjustment conditions and adjustments, various disclosed in paragraphs (3), (4) and (5) Traditional supplements. In addition, it more specifically includes supplementing the particles with a transition metal hexacoordination complex containing one or more organic ligands, as described in U.S. Patent No. 5,36,712,712 by Wom (01m) et al. Like. More explicitly includes a centrally-oriented stereolattice of an additive-enhanced particle that can increase the imaging speed by forming a shallow electron trap (hereinafter also referred to as SET), as discussed in Research Publication No. 36736 published in November 1994 Like. SET supplements are effective at any position within the particle. Usually when the set supplement is 50% of the blended particles, better results are obtained based on silver. The best SET SET particle area ranges from all silver forming particles to 85% silver formers. SET can be incorporated into the container at the same time or during the continuous precipitation of particles ... ------- Order --------- {Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) • 34- Ministry of Economic Affairs Wisdom Printed by the Consumer Affairs Cooperative of the Property Bureau 588213 V. Description of the invention (32 Zhongtong 4 Φ Cheng SET supplements are mixed at a concentration of at least 1 × 10 · 7 mol per mol silver to its' combination limit, typically up to About 5 x 10 · 4 moles per mole of silver. SET supplements are known to reduce mutual damage. In particular, it is advantageous to use steel six coordination complexes or Ir + 4 complexes as set supplements. Indium supplements (non-SET supplements) that effectively provide shallow electron drunk can also be blended in the particles of the silver particle emulsion to reduce mutual damage. In order to effectively improve mutual properties, indium can be present in any of the particle structures. Position. The best position in the particle structure where the steel supplement produces mutual improvement is the field formed after the first 6.0 seconds and before the last 1% of the precipitated silver (preferably at the last 3/0). Within the granule area. Supplements can be mixed at the same time or blended during continuous pellet precipitation In the container. Mutually improved non-SET Ir supplements are usually blended at their lowest effective concentrations. The comparison of the hydrazone and phase components can be performed by using nitrosyl or thionitrosyl-containing ligands (NZ supplements). 6) Coordination complexes enhance the particles, as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 7,933,272 by McDougall (= DUgle). Contrast enhanced additives can be incorporated into the particle structure at any suitable location. Medium. However, if the NZ supplement is present on the particle surface, it can reduce the sensitivity of the particle I. Therefore, the Nz supplement is preferably located in the particle, so it precipitates all precipitated silver by forming iodized silver particles. At least ι% (preferably at least 3%) and separated from the particle surface. \ 2 The better contrast of the supplement is to increase the concentration in the range of 10-11 to 10-8 Moore per mole of silver, A particularly preferred concentration range is from 7 to ^ 8 Moore range per mole of silver tincture. Although various SET, non-SET Ir and NZ supplements are _ generally better concentration range: · ------- order --- ------ 丨 · (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) -35 588213 A7 Printed by the Bureau ’s Consumer Cooperatives. 5. Description of the Invention (34) Any useful K-sensitive silver, such as _Silver, can be used in the components used in this: Ming, preferably less than 10 grams per square meter. Silver. Silver I is preferably less than 7 g / m², and the amount of silver is even lower than 5 g / m². The silver amount of the improved element optics is lower, so it can be used to produce sharper images. These lower amounts of silver are more important in enabling the component to develop and remove silver quickly. Conversely, to achieve exposure latitude of at least 2.7 lOgE, on the one hand, maintaining a sufficiently low granularity position for the image to be enlarged requires per square meter Support a surface area of at least 1.5 grams of silver coated silver coating. BU contains at least one yellow dye imaging coupler, υ contains at least one magenta dye imaging coupler, and RU contains at least one cyan dye imaging coupler. A suitable combination of any conventional dye imaging coupler can be used. The conventional dye imaging coupling agent is disclosed by the above-exemplified research. I, X dye imaging agent and adjusting agent &apos; Photographic elements may further include other image-adjusting compounds, such as "development inhibitor-release" compounds (DIR). There are more dirs for the elements of the present invention, known in the art, and examples are in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,137,578; 3 ^ 48,022 3,148,062; 3,227,554; 3,384,657; 3,379,529; 3,615,506 3,617,291; 3,620,746; 3,701,783; 3,733,455 4,095; 049, 459, 126; 049 4,149,886; 4,150,228; 4,211,562 4,248,962; 4,259,437; 4,362,878; 4,409,323; 4,477,563 4,783,012; 4,962,018; 4,500,634; 4,579,816; 4,607,004 4,618,571; papers, 4,746,049, 959; 4,746,602; 959, 4,746,601; China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) ------ Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 588213 Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by employees' consumer cooperatives A7 B7 V. Invention Description (35) 4,946,767; 4,948,716; 4,952,485; 4,956,269; 4,959,299; 4,966,835; 4,985,336, and Patent Bulletin German Patent No. GB 1,560,240; GB 2,007,662; GB 2,032,914; GB 2,099 167; first DE 2,842,063; DE 2,937,127; DE 3,636,824; DE No. 3,644,416, as well as the following European Patent Publication No. 272,573; 335,319; 336,411; 346,899; 362,870; 365,252; 365,346; 373,382; 376,212; 377,463; 378,236; 384,670; 396,486; 401,612 ; Described in No. 401, 613. DIR compounds are also disclosed in "Developer-Inhibitor-Release (DIR) Couplers for Color Photography", CR Barr, JR Thirtle, and P.W. Vittum '' Photographic Science And Photographic Science and Engineering, Vol. 13, p. 174 (1969). It is common practice to apply one, two, or three historical JMLc liquid layers in a single dye imaging layer unit. When two or more emulsion layers are coated in a single layer unit, they are typically selected to distinguish between photosensitivity. When a higher-sensitivity emulsion is coated on a lower-sensitivity emulsion, a faster speed is obtained than when the two emulsion systems are mixed. When the lower-sensitivity emulsion is coated on the higher-sensitivity emulsion, the obtained pair is higher than when the two emulsion systems are mixed. Preferably, the most sensitive emulsion is located closest to the source of exposure radiation, and the lowest emulsion is located closest to the support. One or more layer units of the present invention are preferably subdivided into at least two, more preferably three or more sub-unit layers. It is preferable that all the photosensitive silver halide emulsions in the color recording unit have spectral sensitivity in the same visible spectrum region. In this specific embodiment, when the silver halide emulsion mixed in the unit has -38- this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) --------- --------- tr --------- ^^ 丨 # (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 588213 Printed by A7, Consumer Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Description of the invention (36) In the spectral absorption of the present invention, it is expected that there will be less 4 differences in spectral absorption between them. In a still better embodiment, the sensitivity of the slower-toothed silver emulsion is explicitly adjusted to account for the light-shielding effect of the faster silver halide emulsion in the layer units above it, so as to change from low to high with exposure The photometric green material provides a uniform spectral response across the entire image. Therefore, in slower emulsions with subdivided layer units, it may be desirable to have a higher proportion of peak light absorption spectrum photosensitizing dyes to illustrate the masking and relaxation of the peaks of photosensitivity in the lower layer. The inner layers IL1 and IL2 have a hydrophilic layer with reduced color pollution as their main function-that is, to prevent the oxidized developer from moving to the adjacent recording layer unit before reacting with the color coupling agent. The inner layer is somewhat simple and effective by increasing the length of the diffusion path that the oxidized developer must travel. In order to improve the efficiency of the inner layer to intercept the oxidized developer, the traditional practice is to mix the oxidized developer. Anti-staining agents (oxidized developer digesters) can be revealed from research. • Dye-forming agents and modifiers, D. Hue modifiers / stabilizers, those selected in paragraph ⑺. When one or more of the GU and RU silver emulsions are high bromide emulsions, and therefore have a significant negative sensitivity to blue light, it is preferable to mix a yellow filter in ili, such as Carey Lea silver Or yellow rinse solution can decolorize the dye. Appropriate yellow filter dyes can be selected from the researcher, section νιπ. Absorbing and Scattering Materials, B. Absorbing Materials. In the element of the case invention, the 'violet-red staining filter material lacks IL2 and ru. The anti-blooming layer unit AHU typically contains a rinsing liquid that can remove or decolorize a light absorbing material, such as a pigment and a dye or a combination thereof. Suitable materials can be selected from those disclosed in Research Disclosure I, Section VIII. Absorbent Materials. ^ Hu -39- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ------- Order ---- ----- 588213 A7

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(37) 之常見替代位置係位於支撑體s和最接近支撑體塗佈之記 綠層之間。 表面覆蓋層SOC係親水性膠體層,其係用以在操作沖洗 加工期間物理性保護彩色負片元件。各S〇c亦提供參混附 加物之便利位置,其在彩色負片元件表面處或附近最有 效。在一些實例中,表面覆蓋層被分割爲表面層和内層, 後者係作爲表面層内附加物和鄰近記錄層單元間之隔片。 在另一常見變化形式中,附加物位於表面層和内層之間, 後者包含與鄰近記錄層單元相容之附加物。最典型上該 SOC包含附加物,如塗料輔助劑,增塑劑和潤滑劑,抗靜 電劑和消光劑,如研究揭示z,章節IX•塗料物理性質調整 附加物所説明般。soc覆蓋於乳液層上,較佳額外包含紫 外線吸收劑,如研究揭示J,章節νι· uv染料/光學增亮劑/ 發光劑,第(1)段所説明。 不用元件SCN-1之層單元序列,能夠使用替代性層單元 序列,且對於一些乳液選擇而言,其尤其具吸引力。使用 尚氣化物乳液和/或薄(&lt;0·2微米平均顆粒厚度)平片狀顆粒 乳液,能夠保證BU,GU和RU位置所有可能之交替位置, 供少負藍色記錄藍光污染之風險,因爲這些乳液在可見光 譜内呈現微小與生俱來之感光性。基於相同原因,不需要 將藍光吸收劑參混於内層中。 當染料成像層單元内乳液層速度不同時,傳統實務上係 將摻混於較高速層内之染料成像偶合劑限制至低於化學計 量份量,以銀爲基準。最高速乳液層之作用係產生特徵曲 -40- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------------------訂---------丨· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 —1__' 1 一 五、發明說明(38) 線恰南於最低密度之邵份-即低於層單元中剩餘乳液層之 門摇感光度之曝光區内。如此,將提高粒度之最高感光性 速度乳液層添加於產生之染料影像記錄便減至最低,而不 犧牲顯影速度。 在以上討論中,藍,綠和紅色記錄層係分別敘述爲含 黃’紫紅和青色之影像現色偶合劑,如同印刷用彩色負片 元件之傳統實務般。本發明能夠適當地應用於所例舉之傳 統彩色負片結構中。逆色軟片結構將採取類似形式,除了 修色偶合劑將完全不存在之外;在典型形式中,顯影抑制 劑釋放型偶合劑亦不存在。在較佳具體實施例中,彩色負 片元件限於掃描而產生三個個別電子彩色記綠。因此所產 生於像染料之興正色調便不重要。絕對必要的是僅在各層 單元内產生之染色影像與各剩餘層單元所產生者不同。爲 了提供此區分能力,預期各層單元包含一種或多種經選擇 之染料成像偶合劑,以產生具有吸收半尖峰帶寬位於不同 光譜區内之影像染料。藍,綠或紅色記綠層單元是否形成 在光譜中藍,綠或紅色區内具有吸收半尖峰帶寬之黃,紫 紅或青色染料,如傳統上於預期用於印片之彩色負片元件 般是微不足道的,或者在任何光譜其它合宜區域内之吸收 半尖峰帶寬,分佈從近紫外線(3〇〇_4〇〇毫微米)至可見且至 近紅外線(70CM200毫微米),只要層單元中影像染料之吸 收半尖峰帶寬延伸超越實質上非共延伸波長範園。「實質 上非共延伸波長範圍」表示各影像染料呈現吸收半尖峰帶 寬延伸超越至少25(較佳50)毫微米光譜區,該區未被另一 -41 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公楚) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} 拳 寫本頁 ------tr--------- 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(39) 影像染之吸收半尖峰帶寬佔據。理想上該影像染料呈現相 互排外之吸收半尖峰帶寬。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 當層單凡包含二種或多種速度不同之乳液層時,能夠藉 由在層單元各乳液層中形成一種染色影像,其吸收半尖峰 帶寬位於不同光譜區内,而將欲觀察,從電子記錄改造之 影像之影像粒度降低至低於層單元中其它乳液層之染色影 像。此技術尤其適用於層單元被細分爲速度不同之次單元 之元件。此容許各層單元產生多重電子記錄,相當於由相 同光譜感光度之乳液層形成之不同染色影像。掃描最高速 乳液層所形成染色影像而形成之數位記錄係用以改造染色 影像欲觀察恰位於最低密度上面之部份。在更高譜光度 時,第二和視需要之第三電子記綠能夠藉由掃描由剩餘乳 液層形成之光谱差異化染色影像而形成。這些數位記錄包 含較低雜訊(較低粒度),且能夠在較緩慢乳液層門檻譜光 度上之曝光範圍上改造欲觀察之影像。此降低粒度之技術 係於美國專利第5,314,794號中由薩頓(Sutton)更詳細揭示。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本發明彩色負片元件之各層單元產生染色影像特徵曲線 反差係數低於1·5,其有助於得到曝光寬容度爲至少2.7 log E。多色彩照相元件之最低可接受曝光寬容度係容許正確 言己錄照相用途中發生之最極度白色(例如新娘禮服)和最極 度黑色(例如新郎燕尾服)。曝光寬容度2.6 log E恰能夠容 納典型之新娘和新郎婚禮景物。曝光寬容度至少3 〇 l〇g E 較佳’因爲此容許照相者選擇曝光度之相當誤差界限。甚 至較大曝光寬容度尤其較佳,因爲實現以較大曝光誤差得 -42- 本紙張尺度剌τ國國家標準(CNS)A4規格⑽x 297公^7 A7 B7 部 智 慧 財 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 五、發明說明(4〇) =確影像重現之能力。而在預期用料片之彩色負片元 〜印厂片反差係數異常地低時,常失去印片景物之視 w彩色負片几件經掃描而產生數位染料影像記 對比能夠藉由調整電子信號資訊而提高。當使用反 +先束掃描本發明之元件時,光束移動穿過層單元二次。 此:效地藉由密度⑽)變成二倍而使反差係數(嫌― 去爲-倍。因此’包括如1G或甚至G6般低之反差係數 和達約5.01〇gE或更高之曝光寬容度是可行的。反差係數 約0.55為佳。反差係數介於約〇4和〇5之間尤其較佳。 不使用現色偶合劑’能夠將任何在多色彩顯影中傳統上 參混之產生染色影像化合物參混於藍,綠和紅色記錄層單 疋中。染料影像能夠以如曝光之作用般選擇性破壞,形成 ,物理性移除染料而產生。例如,銀染料漂白沖洗加工法 疋眾所周知且商業上係用於藉由選擇性破壞所接混影像染 料而形成染料影像。銀染料漂白法係由研究揭示】,章節χ 染色影像成形劑和調整劑,Α.銀染料漂白説明。 預成像染料能夠摻混於藍,綠和紅色記錄層單元中亦眾 所周知,選擇之染料最初爲固定不冑,但能夠如進入具已 氧化顯影劑之氧化還原反應之作用般,釋放移動部份内染 料發色基。這些化合物在商業上參照爲氧化還原染料釋放 劑(RDR)。藉由洗去釋放之移動性染料,能夠掃描產生之 保留染色影像。亦能夠將釋放之移動性染料轉移至接受 器’其中該接受器係固定於媒染劑層中。其後能夠掃描載 影接受器。最初該接受器爲彩色負片元件之完整部份。當 -43 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21G X 297公爱— 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(41) 以保持元件完整部份之接受器進行掃描時,該接受器典型 上包含-種透明支撑體’載染色影像媒染劑層恰於支撑體 下面,白色反射層恰於媒染劑層下面。在接受器從彩色备 片元件剝除以幫助掃描染色影像處,接受器支撑體能夠具 反射性,當預期觀察染料影像時其爲最常見之選擇,或是 透明,其容許透射掃描該染色影像。RDR和彼等參混之染 料影像轉移系統係於1976年11月之研究揭示,第ι51册, 第15162項中敘述。 亦瞭解該染色影像能夠由最初可移動,但在全影像顯影 期間被賦予不可移動之化合物提供。使用此形態顯影染料 之;像轉移系統頃長期用於先前揭示之染料影像轉移系 統。這些和其它與本發明實務相容之影像轉移系統係於 1978年12月研究揭示’第176册,第17643項,XXIII·影像 轉移系統中揭示。 許多彩色負片元件頃經建議於調節掃描,如研究揭示I, 章節XIV.掃描幫助特點所説明般。這些系統到上述彩色負 片元件結構相容之程度係包括於用於本發明之實務。 亦預期本發明之顯影元件可以與非傳統感光設計一起使 用。例如,不使用感光爲光譜之紅綠和藍色區域之顯影 層’該感光材料可以具有一種白色感光層以記錄景物發光 密度’和二感色層以記錄景物色度。顯影後,能夠掃描產 生之影像,並經數位方式再處理以再建構原始景物之全色 彩,如美國專利第5,962,205號中所述般。顯影元件亦可以 包括一種具附隨色彩分離曝光之全感光(pan-sensitizeci)乳 -44- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. A common alternative location for invention description (37) is between the support s and the green layer closest to the coating of the support. The surface covering layer SOC is a hydrophilic colloid layer, which is used to physically protect the color negative element during the processing process. Each Soc also provides a convenient location for admixtures that are most effective at or near the surface of the color negative element. In some examples, the surface cover layer is divided into a surface layer and an inner layer, the latter serving as a spacer within the surface layer and adjacent recording layer units. In another common variation, the addenda are located between the surface layer and the inner layer, the latter containing addenda that are compatible with adjacent recording layer units. Most typically this SOC contains additives such as coating auxiliaries, plasticizers and lubricants, anti-static agents and matting agents, as described in research reveals, Chapter IX • Coating Physical Properties Adjustment Additives. The soc covers the emulsion layer and preferably additionally contains an ultraviolet absorber, as described in Research Rev. J, chapter v · uv dyes / optical brighteners / luminescing agents, paragraph (1). Instead of the layer unit sequence of the element SCN-1, alternative layer unit sequences can be used and are particularly attractive for some emulsion options. Use of noble gas emulsions and / or thin (&lt; 0.2 micron average particle thickness) flat plate-like particle emulsions can ensure all possible alternate positions of BU, GU, and RU positions, providing less negative blue to record the risk of blue light pollution Because these emulsions exhibit tiny innate sensitivity in the visible spectrum. For the same reason, it is not necessary to incorporate a blue light absorber in the inner layer. When the speed of the emulsion layer in the dye imaging layer unit is different, the traditional practice is to limit the dye imaging coupling agent blended in the higher speed layer to less than the stoichiometric amount, based on silver. The function of the highest speed emulsion layer is to produce characteristic curve -40- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------------ -Order --------- 丨 · (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 588213 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 —1__ ' ) The line is just south of the lowest-density shao-the exposure area that is lower than the door shake sensitivity of the remaining emulsion layer in the layer unit. In this way, adding the highest sensitivity speed emulsion layer with increased particle size to the resulting dye image recording is minimized without sacrificing development speed. In the above discussion, the blue, green, and red recording layers are described as yellow-purple and cyan-containing image color couplers, as is the traditional practice of color negative elements for printing. The present invention can be suitably applied to the conventional color negative film structure exemplified. The reverse color film structure will take a similar form, except that the color modification coupling agent will be completely absent; in a typical form, the development inhibitor release type coupling agent will also not exist. In a preferred embodiment, the color negative element is limited to scanning to produce three individual electronic color greens. Therefore, the positive tone produced by dyes is not important. It is absolutely necessary that the stained image produced only in each layer unit is different from that produced in each remaining layer unit. To provide this discrimination, each layer unit is expected to contain one or more selected dye imaging coupling agents to produce imaging dyes with absorption half-peak bandwidths in different spectral regions. Blue, green, or red records whether the green layer unit forms a yellow, magenta, or cyan dye with an absorption half-peak bandwidth in the blue, green, or red region of the spectrum, as insignificant as traditionally used in color negative elements intended for printing The absorption half-peak bandwidth in the spectrum, or in any other suitable region of the spectrum, ranges from near-ultraviolet (300-400 nm) to visible and near-infrared (70CM200 nm), as long as the absorption of the image dye in the layer unit The half-peak bandwidth extends beyond the substantially non-coextensive wavelength range. "Substantially non-co-extending wavelength range" means that each image dye exhibits an absorption half-peak bandwidth that extends beyond at least 25 (preferably 50) nanometer spectral region, and this region is not another -41-This paper scale applies Chinese National Standard (CNS ) A4 size (210 X 297 Gongchu) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page} Write this page ------ tr --------- 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (39) The absorption half-peak bandwidth of the image dye is occupied. Ideally, the image dyes exhibit mutually exclusive absorption half-peak bandwidths. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page.) When the layer sheet contains two or more different speeds In the emulsion layer, by forming a dyed image in each emulsion layer of the layer unit, the absorption half-peak bandwidth is located in different spectral regions, and the image granularity of the image to be observed and reconstructed from the electronic record is reduced below the layer. Dyeing images of other emulsion layers in the unit. This technique is particularly suitable for elements in which the layer unit is subdivided into sub-units of different speeds. This allows each layer unit to generate multiple electronic records, which is equivalent to the same spectral sensitivity. Different dyeing images formed by the emulsion layer. The digital record formed by scanning the dyeing images formed by the highest-speed emulsion layer is used to modify the dyed image to observe the portion just above the lowest density. At higher spectral luminosity, the second and the visual The required third electronic record green can be formed by scanning the spectrally differentiated stained images formed by the remaining emulsion layer. These digital records contain lower noise (lower granularity) and can be measured on the threshold spectrum of the slower emulsion layer Reconstruct the image to be observed over the exposure range. This technique for reducing the granularity is disclosed in more detail by Sutton in US Patent No. 5,314,794. The consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs prints the layers of the color negative element of the present invention The contrast coefficient of the characteristic curve of the dyed image produced by the unit is lower than 1.5, which helps to obtain an exposure latitude of at least 2.7 log E. The minimum acceptable exposure latitude of a multi-color photographic element is to allow correct interpretation of what has occurred in photographic applications. The most extreme white (such as a bridal gown) and the most extreme black (such as a groom's tuxedo). Exposure latitude 2.6 l og E is able to accommodate typical bride and groom wedding scenes. Exposure latitude is at least 301 g. E is better because it allows photographers to choose a fairly margin of error for exposure. Even larger exposure latitude is particularly preferred because Achieved with large exposure error -42- This paper size 剌 τ National Standard (CNS) A4 size x 297 public ^ 7 A7 B7 Printed by the Ministry of Smart Financial Staff Consumer Cooperatives V. Description of the invention (4〇) = True image weight At the time when the expected negative value of the color negative element of the used film to the print film is abnormally low, the number of color negative films that are often lost due to the loss of the printed scene can be scanned to generate a digital dye image. The contrast can be adjusted by adjusting Electronic signal information. When scanning an element of the invention using a reverse + first beam, the beam moves through the layer unit twice. This: Effectively doubles the density by the density ⑽) (there is-to-times. So 'includes a low contrast factor like 1G or even G6 and an exposure latitude of about 5.01 gE or higher It is feasible. Contrast coefficient of about 0.55 is preferred. Contrast coefficient of between about 〇4 and 〇5 is particularly preferred. Without the use of a color coupling agent, it can produce any dyed image traditionally mixed in multi-color development. Compounds are incorporated in the blue, green, and red recording layers. Dye images can be selectively destroyed, formed, and physically removed as a result of exposure. For example, silver dye bleach processing is well known and commercially available. The above series is used to form dye images by selectively destroying the mixed image dyes. The silver dye bleaching method is revealed by research], Chapter χ Dyeing Image Forming Agents and Regulators, A. Silver Dye Bleaching Instructions. Pre-imaging dyes can It is also well known that it is mixed in blue, green and red recording layer units. The selected dye is initially fixed, but it can be released as it enters the redox reaction with the oxidized developer. The dye chromophore in the moving part. These compounds are commercially referred to as redox dye release agents (RDR). By washing away the released mobile dye, the retained dyed image can be scanned. The released mobile can also be released. The dye is transferred to the receiver, where the receiver is fixed in the mordant layer. After that, the film receiver can be scanned. Initially, the receiver is a complete part of the color negative element. When -43-This paper standard applies to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21G X 297 public love — 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (41) When scanning with a receiver that maintains a complete part of the component, the receiver typically contains a kind of transparent support 'load dyeing' The image mordant layer is just below the support body, and the white reflective layer is just below the mordant layer. The receiver support can be reflective when the receiver is peeled from the color film element to help scan the dyed image. When the dye is expected to be observed It is the most common choice when imaging, or it is transparent, which allows transmission to scan the stained image. RDR and their mixed dye image transfer systems were established in 1976 1 January research reveals that it is described in Volume ι51, Item 15162. It is also understood that the stained image can be provided by a compound that was initially movable but was given immobility during full-image development. Using this form of developing dye; image transfer The systems have long been used in previously disclosed dye image transfer systems. These and other image transfer systems that are compatible with the practice of the present invention were disclosed in the December 1978 Research Reveal 'Volume 176, Item 17743, XXIII · Image Transfer System Many color negative elements have been suggested for regulating scanning, as described in Research Reveal I, Chapter XIV. Scanning Help Features. These systems are included in the practice of the present invention to the extent that the color negative elements are structurally compatible as described above. It is expected that the developing element of the present invention can be used with non-conventional photosensitive designs. For example, instead of using a developing layer that is sensitive to the red, green, and blue regions of the spectrum, the photosensitive material may have a white photosensitive layer to record the luminous density of the scene, and a two-sensitive color layer to record the chromaticity of the scene. After development, the resulting image can be scanned and digitally reprocessed to reconstruct the full color of the original scene, as described in US Patent No. 5,962,205. The developing element can also include a pan-sensitizeci milk with a color separation exposure -44- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Fill in this page again)

^9-------tr---------L 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 五、發明說明(42) 液。在此具體實施例中,本 .1 φ ^ ^ 顯影劑引起一種具染色 多♦俏。产„ 丄 將月匕夠冗全回復原始景物 邑彩値。在此一元件中,影像 稀赤少括你 琢J以由經顯影之銀密度,一 種或夕種傳統偶合物之結合物 「愛备 物或如間苯二酚偶合劑之 ^ Bi ^ ^ +尤了以依序經由適當濾鏡, 二時完:由間隔不連續之據鏡元件(常稱之爲「色㈣ 顯影元件亦可以是—種黑白顯影材料,其包括 =全感光自化銀乳液和本發明之_劑。在此具體、實施 例中’影像可以由經顯影銀密度繼之沖洗加工而形成,或 由產生能夠用以帶動中性影像色調比例之染料之偶合劑產 生0 當形成傳統黃,紫紅或青色影像染料以分析記錄之景物 曝光,繼足將傳統曝光彩色照相材料化學顯影時,元件中 紅,綠和藍色記錄單元之回應能夠以檢測其密度而正確辨 別。光密度敎法係㈣品之透射之光測量値,其使用經 選擇之有色濾鏡將RGB染料成像單元之全影像回應分離爲 相關(獨立頻道。常使用史戴特斯(Status) Μ遽鏡判斷預期 用於光子印片之彩色負片元件之回應,並於預期用於直接 透射觀察之逆色軟片使用史戴特斯Α濾鏡。在完整光密度 測定法中,不完美影像中不希望之側邊和尾部吸收造成少 量頻道混合,其中例如紫紅頻道之全部回應之部份可以來 自中間色特徵曲線中黃色或青色影像染料記錄或二者之非 尖岭吸收。在測量軟片之光譜感光度時可以忽略此類後生 -45- 本紙張尺度遇用1P國國豕標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 一· -------tr--------- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 哪213 五、發明說明(43)^ 9 ------- tr --------- L Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 588213 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 V. Description of the Invention (42) Liquid . In this embodiment, the .1 φ ^ ^ developer causes a kind of staining. „丄 丄 The moon dagger is enough to fully restore the original scenery, Yi Cai. In this element, the image is scarce and you can see the quality of the developed silver, a combination of one or more traditional conjugates. ^ Bi ^ ^ + especially the resorcinol coupling agent, especially through the appropriate filter in order, at two o'clock: from the discontinuous mirror element (often referred to as "color ㈣ development element can also be A black-and-white developing material, which includes: a fully photosensitive auto-silver emulsion and an agent of the present invention. In this embodiment, the image can be formed by developing the density of the developed silver followed by processing, or by producing The coupling agent of the dye that drives the neutral image tone ratio produces 0. When the traditional yellow, magenta or cyan image dye is formed to analyze the recorded scenes for exposure, following the chemical development of traditional exposure color photographic materials, the components are red, green and blue. The response of the recording unit can be accurately discriminated by detecting its density. The optical density method is a transmission light measurement of a fake, which uses a selected colored filter to separate the full image response of the RGB dye imaging unit into a correlation (Independent channel. The status MEMS mirror is often used to judge the response of the color negative element expected for photon printing, and the inverse color film expected to be used for direct transmission observation is to use the Status A filter In complete densitometry, unwanted side and tail absorption in imperfect images cause a small amount of channel mixing, of which, for example, the full response part of the magenta channel can come from the yellow or cyan image dye records in the mid-color characteristic curve or two Non-sharp ridge absorption. This kind of epigenetic can be ignored when measuring the spectral sensitivity of the film. -45- This paper standard meets 1P National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇X 297 public love) (Please read first Note on the back, please fill out this page) I. ------- tr --------- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 213 5. Invention Description (43)

現象。藉由適當數學處理完整密度回應,能夠完全校正這 些不希望 &lt; 非尖峰密度分佈,以提供分析密度,其中既定 色彩#己錄 &lt; 回應與其它影像染料之光譜分佈無關。分析密 度測定頃摘綠於照相科學和工程之SPSE手册(SPSE of Photographic Science and Engineering),W·湯姆 士 (Thomas),作者,約翰威利和桑司(J〇hn wiley — s_),紐 約’ 1973,章節15·3,色彩光密度分析法,ρρ· 840-848。 月匕夠降低衫像雜訊,其中藉由掃描經曝光並經處理之彩 色負片件,得到影像圖騰之可變換電子記錄,繼之將經 调整電子1己綠再轉變爲可觀察形式而得到影像。影像銳度 和色彩夕樣性能夠藉由將層反差係數比例設計爲在狹小範 圍内而提高,一方面避免或將其它性能缺點減至最低,其 中色彩記綠係在改造欲觀察之色彩影像前以電子形式放 不能夠將影像雜訊與剩餘之影像資訊分離,不論 疋在印片時或藉由變換電子影像記綠,能夠以調整呈現低 雜訊之電子影像記錄,如同由具低反差係數比例之彩色負 片元件所提供般,而以一種不能夠由已知印片技術達成之 万式改艮整體曲線形狀和銳度特徵。因此,能夠從衍生自 此類彩色負片元件之電子影像記綠改造影像,其優於類似 地衍生自建構以用於光學印片應用之傳統彩色負片元件 者。當各紅,綠和藍色記錄單元之反差係數比例低於12 時,便得到所述元件之優良顯影特徵。在一更佳具體實施 ^中,琢紅,綠和藍感光現色單元各呈現反差係數比例低 万;1.15。在一甚至更佳之具體實施例中,該紅,綠和藍感 -46- Κ紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 χ 297公釐phenomenon. By properly processing the complete density response, these undesired &lt; non-spike density distributions can be fully corrected to provide analytical density, where the given color # 己 录 &lt; response is independent of the spectral distribution of other image dyes. Analytical Density Measurements are Extracted from the SPSE of Photographic Science and Engineering, W. Thomas, Author, John Wiley and Sang, New York '1973 , Chapter 15.3, Color Optical Density Analysis, ρρ · 840-848. The moon dagger can reduce the noise of the shirt. By scanning the exposed and processed color negatives, a convertible electronic record of the image totem is obtained, and then the adjusted electron 1 is converted into an observable form to obtain an image. . Image sharpness and color appearance can be improved by designing the layer contrast coefficient ratio within a narrow range. On the one hand, it avoids or minimizes other performance disadvantages. Among them, the green color system is used to transform the color image to be observed. The electronic form cannot separate the image noise from the rest of the image information. Whether it is printed during printing or by changing the electronic image to record green, the electronic image record with low noise can be adjusted as if it has a low contrast coefficient. The proportional color negative element provides the same, but with a general curve shape and sharpness characteristics that can not be achieved by known printing technology. Therefore, it is possible to reconstruct an image from an electronic image derived from such a color negative element, which is superior to those similarly derived from a conventional color negative element constructed for optical printing applications. When the contrast coefficient ratio of each of the red, green and blue recording units is lower than 12, the excellent developing characteristics of the element are obtained. In a better specific implementation, the ratios of the contrast coefficients of the red, green, and blue photosensitive color rendering units are each low; 1.15. In an even better specific embodiment, the red, green and blue sensations -46- κ paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (21 × 297 mm)

— — — — — — ti! _% (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(Μ) 光現色單元各呈現反差係數比例低於110。在一最佳具體 貫施例中,該紅,綠和藍感光成色單元各呈現反差係數比 例低於1.10。在所有情況中,較佳個別色彩單元呈現反差 係數比例低於1.15,更佳其呈現反差係數比例低於11〇, 甚至更佳其主現反差係數比例低於1 ·。層單元之反差係 數比例不需要相等。這些低反差係數比例値爲層單元間低 私度内層父互作用之指標,亦已知爲内層影像間效應,且 咸仏爲説明掃描和電子變換後影像之改良品質。從層單元 間化學父互作用產生之外觀上不利影像不需要在影像變換 活性期間以電子方式抑制。倘若不能使用已知電子影像變 換設計適當地抑制,交互作用常是困難的。 具優良感光度之元件最佳用於本發明之實務。該元件應 該具有感光度爲至少ISO 50,較佳具有感光度爲至少ISO 100,更佳具有感光度爲至少ISO 200。尤其包括具有感光 度達ISO 3200或甚至更高之元件。彩色負片照相元件之速 度或感光度與在沖洗加工後能夠得到高於朦霧之特定密度 所需之曝光成相反關係。在各色彩記錄中具反差係數爲約 0.65之彩色負片元件的照相速度,頃由美國國家標準協會 (American National Standards Institute)(ANSI)明確地定義爲 ANSI標準數字PH 2.27-1981 (IS0(ASA速度)),尤其與在彩 色軟片中各綠色感光和最低感光性彩色記錄單元中,產生 密度高於最低密度0· 15所需之曝光程度平均相關。此定義 符合國際標準協會(ISO)之軟片速度評比。爲了此應用之目 的,倘若色彩單元反差係數與0.65不同,ASA或ISO速度將 -47- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) --!s 訂---------*^^1 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 588213— — — — — — Ti! _% (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (M) The ratio of the contrast coefficient of each light-colored unit is less than 110. In a preferred embodiment, each of the red, green and blue photosensitive color-forming units exhibits a contrast ratio of less than 1.10. In all cases, it is preferred that the individual color units exhibit a contrast coefficient ratio of less than 1.15, more preferably that they exhibit a contrast coefficient ratio of less than 110, and even better that their main present contrast coefficient ratio is less than 1 ·. The contrast coefficients of the layer units need not be equal. These low-contrast coefficient ratios are indicators of low-private inner-parent interactions between layer units. They are also known as inter-layer image effects, and are used to explain the improved quality of images after scanning and electronic transformation. Visually unfavorable images resulting from chemical parent interactions between layer units do not need to be electronically suppressed during image transformation actives. Interactions are often difficult if they cannot be properly suppressed using known electronic image transformation designs. Elements with excellent sensitivity are best used in the practice of this invention. The element should have a sensitivity of at least ISO 50, preferably have a sensitivity of at least ISO 100, and more preferably have a sensitivity of at least ISO 200. This includes components with a sensitivity of ISO 3200 or higher. The speed or sensitivity of a color negative photographic element is inversely related to the exposure required to obtain a specific density higher than the haze after processing. The photographic speed of a color negative element having a contrast coefficient of approximately 0.65 in each color record is clearly defined by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) as the ANSI standard digital PH 2.27-1981 (IS0 (ASA Speed )), Especially in the green film and the lowest-sensitivity color recording unit in the color film, the average degree of exposure required to produce a density higher than the minimum density of 0.15 is evenly related. This definition conforms to the ISO film speed evaluation. For the purpose of this application, if the color unit contrast coefficient is different from 0.65, the ASA or ISO speed will be -47- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back first (Fill in this page again)-! S Order --------- * ^^ 1 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 588213

、發明說明(45) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 2用不时式定義之方式敎速度前,“將反差係數 相對於log E (曝光)曲線線性a大或不放大至㈣而計算。 本發明亦包括本發明之照相元件於常參照爲單次使用照 相機(或立即拍(film with lens)單元)之用途。這些照相機係 以軟片預裝填於其中而銷售,並將經曝光軟片保留於照相 機内而將整個照相機送還沖洗加工者。本發明中使用之單 次使用照相機能夠是任何該技藝中已知者。這些照相機能 夠提供該技藝中已知之特定特點,如快門裝置,捲片裝 置,推片裝置,防水框架,單一或多重鏡頭,鏡頭選擇裝 置,可變孔,焦距鏡頭,監控照光環境之裝置,調整快門 曝光時間或根據照光環境或使用者所提供指示之鏡頭特徵 之裝置’和照相機將使用環鏡直接記錄於軟片上之裝置ρ 這些特徵包括,但不限於:提供如史卡門(skarman)之美國 專利第4,226,5 17號中所述般之人工或自動推片和重新設定 快門簡化機制;提供如麥特森(Matterson) et al之美國專利 第4,345,835號中所述之自動曝光控制裝置;如富士慕拉 (Fujimura)etal之美國專利第4,766,451號中所述之防潮;提 供如歐姆拉(Ohmura)之美國專利第4,751,536號中所述之内 部和外部軟片匣;提供如湯尼古奇(Taniguchi)之美國專利 第4,780,735號中所述之記錄使用環境於軟片上之裝置;提 供如阿賴(Arai)之美國專利第4,804,987號所述之已安裝鏡 頭照相機;提供如薩薩奇(Sasaki) et al之美國專利第 4,827,298號中所述具優良反捲曲性質之軟片支撑體;提供 如歐姆拉et al之美國專利第4,812,863號中所述之取景器; -48- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ———訂·----丨丨丨丨· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} 588213 A7 B7____ 五、發明說明(46) 提供優喜洛(Ushiro)et al之美國專利第4,812,866號中所述之 界定焦距和鏡頭速度之鏡頭;提供那卡亞馬(Nakayama) et &amp;1之美國專利第4,831,398號和歐姆拉以&amp;1之美國專利第 4,833,495號中所述之多重軟片容器;提供西巴(Shiba)之美 國專利第4,866,469號中所述之具改良抗磨擦特徵之軟片; 提供慕奇達(Mochida)之美國專利第4,884,087號中所述之捲 片機制,旋轉捲片轴,或彈性暗盒;提供武雄(Takei) et al 之美國專利第4,890,130號和第5,063,400號中所述,可沿軸 方向移動之軟片patrone或軟片匣;提供歐姆拉et al之美國 專利第4,896,178號中所述之電子閃光裝置;提供慕奇達et al之美國專利第4,954,857號中所述,用於有效曝光之外部 可操作構件;提供慕拉卡密(Murakami)之美國專利第 5,049,908號中所述,具經調整扣片齒輪孔之軟片支撑體和 推進該軟片之裝置;提供哈拉(Hara)之美國專利第 5,084,719號中所述之内部鏡;和提供亞其(Yagi)etal之歐洲 專利申請第0,466,417 A號中所述,用於緊捲捲片軸上之鹵 化銀乳液。 而軟片可以以任何該技藝中已知之方式架設於單次使用 照相機中,尤其較佳將軟片架設於單次使用照相機中,使 得軟片係以推入匣開始曝光。推入匣係由卡達歐凱 (Kataoka)et al之美國專利第5,226,613號;然達(Zander)之美 國專利第5,200,777號;道林(Dowling)之美國專利第 5,031,852號;和羅伯森(Robertson) et al之美國專利第 4,834,306號揭示。適用以此方式使用推入匣之窄體單次使 -49- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項存填寫本頁) -------tr--------- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(47 ) 用照相機係由托比歐卡(T〇bi〇ka) et al之美國專利第 5,692,221號敘述。更廣言之,最有用於單次使用照相機之 有限尺寸照相機通常形狀爲長方形,且符合易於把持和可 於例如口袋中遷移之必要條件,當此處所述之照相機具有 限體積時。照相機總體積應該低於約45〇立方公分(cc),較 佳低於380 cc,更佳低於3〇〇 cc,最佳低於22〇 cc。爲了提 供舒適把持且可放在口袋中,此一照相機之深度·高度-長 度比例通常將爲約1: 2: 4,各個範圍爲約25%。通常最低可 使用深度係由所結合鏡頭焦距和所結合軟片捲片軸與軟片 匠之尺寸設定。照相機通常較佳大部份角和邊緣之曲率半 徑在約0.2和3公分之間。使用推入匣使本發明中具一種特 殊優點’在於提供對於捲上照相特輸景物之簡易掃描方 法,一方面保護軟片免於灰塵,刮傷,和磨損,其全部傾 向使影像品質劣化。 ' 而本發明之照相機中可以使用任何已知之取景鏡頭,架 設於本發明之單次使用照相機之取景鏡頭較佳爲單一非= 形塑膠鏡頭。這些鏡頭之焦距將在約1〇和1〇〇毫米之間, 鏡頭孔隙在f/2和f/32之間。焦距較佳在約15和6〇毫米之 間,最佳在约20和40毫米之間。關於繪畫應用,焦距符人 長方形軟片曝光面積25%内較佳。在f/28*f/22間之鏡二 孔隙包括約f/4至f/ 16之鏡頭孔隙較佳。在軟片平面鏡頭 MTF於間頻率爲每毫米2〇條線(1 pm)能夠如〇6般低 低雖”卷包括如〇 · 7般咼之値或最佳〇 · 8或更高。較高鏡頭 MTF値容許產生更銳利圖像。尤其涵蓋包括二種,三== ___ -50- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(〇sfS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 丨丨丨·- -------訂---------丨· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 五、發明說明(48) 更機能—致之組份鏡頭多鏡頭排列。 類;==内建沖洗加工能力’例如加熱元件。此 9;、;=其在影像捕捉和顯示系統之設計係於断 如,專利中Γ吴國專利中請序號第〇9/388,573號中敍述。 =利中揭示單次使用照相機之用途在本發明實務中尤 包括相疋件較佳使用任何已知技術全影像曝光, 揭示卜章節XVI中所敘述。此典型上包括曝露於 了,區〈光線,典型上此一曝光爲經由鏡頭之生動影 ^,雖然曝光亦能夠利用發光裝置(如發光二極體,crt等 等)曝光於經儲存影像(如電腦儲存影像)。光感熱照相元件 亦利用各種能量形式曝光’包括電磁光譜之紫外線和紅外 線區,以及電子束和々輻射,r射線,X·射線,&amp;粒子, 中子輻射和由由雷射產生之非同調(任意相)或同調(同相) 之其^形式微粒波狀輻射能。曝光爲單色,整色,或全色 性’視照相鹵化銀之光譜感光性而定。 以上討論之元件可以作爲一些或全部以下沖洗加工之起 始材料:影像掃描產生捕捉影像之電子演繹,其後將該演 绎數位沖洗加工以便以電子方式操作,儲存,傳送,輸 出’或顯示該影像。 本發明之經阻隔化合物可以用於包括任何或全部上述特 點之照相元件,但預期用於部同沖洗加工形式。以下將詳 述這些系統形態。 形式I :熱沖洗加工系統(感熱記綠和光感熱照相),其中 -51 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公楚) A7 五、 發明說明(49) B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 沖洗加工單獨藉由施熱於顯影元件而起動。 形式II:低體積系統’其中軟片沖洗 洗現而起動,但其中沖 :猎由接觸沖 輔助,如在沖洗力ΐ 包括添加非溶液沖洗加工 如在冲冼加工時間施加之熱或層壓層。 形式III:傳統照相系統,其 照相、、φ、、秦、漁;4 、 係藉由接觸傳統 ' /洗加工,此類溶液之體積相較於% &gt; 體積爲非常大。 州杈於顯於層( 形式I ·感熱兄綠和光感熱照相系統 根據本發明之-個觀點,該經阻隔顯影劑係參混於光咸 熱照相π件中。將研究揭示17㈣中所述之光感熱照相^ 件形式併人供參考。光感熱照相元件可以是如研究揭示工 中所述,Α型或Β型。Α型元件包含反應性相關之感光性画 化銀’返原劑或顯影劑,活化劑,和塗料媒液或黏合劑。 在這些系統,顯影係藉由將感性_化銀中之銀離子還原爲 金屬銀而發生。B型系統除了有機化合物與銀離子之鹽類 或錯合物外能夠包含A型系統之全部元件。在這些系統 中,此有機錯合物係在顯影期間被還原而產生銀金屬。該 有機銀鹽將參照爲銀予體。敘述此類顯影元件之參考資料 包括例如美國專利第3,457,057 ; 4,459,350 ; 4,264,725和 4,741,992 號。 光感熱照相元件包括感光組份,其基本上由照相性鹵化 銀組成。在B型光感熱照相材料中,咸信來自自化銀之潛 影銀,當沖洗加工時係作爲所述成像結合之觸媒。在這些 -52- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ^9-------訂---------%1· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 A7 B7 - ------- 丨- 五、發明說明(50) 系統中,在光感熱照相材料中照相_化銀之較佳濃度係在 每莫耳銀予體〇·〇ΐ至100莫耳照相鹵化銀範圍内。 Β型光感熱照相元件包括一種包含有機銀鹽氧化劑之氧 化還原成像結合物。有機銀鹽係一種銀鹽,其對於光較單 定,但當在經曝光光觸媒(即感光性卣化銀)和還原劑存在 下加熱至80°C或高高溫時,有助於形成銀影像。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ------------------訂: (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 適當有機銀鹽包括具有羧基之有機化合物之銀鹽類。其 較佳實例包括脂肪族複酸之鹽類和芳香族叛酸之銀鹽類。 脂肪族羧酸之銀鹽類之較佳實例包括二十二酸銀,硬脂酸 銀,油酸銀,月桂酸銀,癸酸銀,肉豆蔻酸銀,棕摘酸 銀,順丁晞二酸銀,反丁晞二酸銀,酒石酸銀,呋酮酸 銀,烏藥酸銀,丁酸銀和莰二酸銀,其混合物等等。經卣 素元素或羥基取代之銀鹽類亦能夠有效地使用。芳香族幾 酸和其它含複基化合物之銀鹽類之較佳實例包括苯甲酸 銀,經取代之苯甲酸銀,如3,5-二羥基苯甲酸銀,鄰曱基 苯甲酸銀,間甲基苯甲酸銀半對甲基苯甲酸銀,2,4-二氣 苯甲酸銀,乙醯醯胺苯甲酸銀,對苯基苯甲酸銀等等,五 倍子酸銀,單寧酸銀,gj;酸銀,對酞酸銀,水楊酸銀,苯 乙乙酸銀,苯四甲酸銀,3-羧甲基-4-甲基-4-嘧唑林·2·硫 酮或如美國專利第3,785,830號中所述之類似物,和如美國 專利第3,330,663號中所述之含脂肪族羧酸銀鹽類。 尤其包括經巯基或硫酮取代之化合物銀鹽類,其具有含 5或6個環原子,其中至少一個氮之雜環原子核,其它環原 子包括碳,且達二個擇自氧,硫和氮之雜原子。典型上較 -53- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 B7 五、發明說明(51) 佳之雜環原子核包括三唑,&quot;塞唑,噻唑啉,嘧唑 啦,嘧口坐,二口坐,咄冷 一 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 和二畊。這些雜環化合物之實例包 现冬土 2,4_二唑之銀鹽,2-巯苯嘧唑之銀鹽,.2-疏 :5·胺4二唆之銀鹽,2_(2·乙基乙二醇驢胺基)苯並㈣之 銀鹽’ Ί1·:基_2·苯基-4-㈣之銀鹽,疏三呼之 銀鹽’ 2 -綠冬並P号TT坐之相脇 所m美國專利第4,123,274號中 t| ° ’丨,2,4-窥三唑衍生物之銀鹽,如3-胺基 -5 , ^ ^3_^6 ΐ:二Γ…-硫酮之銀鹽,如美國專利3,_ 含雜環原子核之經巯基或硫銅取代 :化“有用《貫例係如下説明:巯乙酸之銀鹽,如S-燒 ,乙奴之銀鹽(其中燒基具有_個碳, t利申請第28221/73號中所述般,二硫羧酸之銀鹽,如二 硫乙酸之銀鹽和硫醯胺之銀鹽。 、此外4夠使用含亞胺基:化合物之銀鹽。這些化合物 之較佳貫例包括苯並三姊其衍生物之銀鹽,% 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 =第二〇27〇/69和—號中所述般,例如苯並三。坐或 甲基冬並三蚁銀鹽等等,㈣素取代之苯並三吐之銀 如5.氣苯並三哇之銀鹽等等,U,4-三味之銀鹽,3·胺 卞基],2,4_三奴銀鹽’屬美國專利第4,22〇,谢號 中斤…H-四唑’嘧唑和嘧唑衍生物之銀鹽,和類似 物。 亦發現使用銀半I,其中藉由從上用二十二酸之納睡水 减沉澱而製備二十二酸鈉等莫耳參混物,並分析約Μ」 -54- 本紙張尺度適財關家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公楚) 獨213 A7 ---------- ---_B7___ 五、發明說明(52) ~' 〜 百分比銀,表示一種較佳實例。在透明薄膜内襯上製造之 透明薄張材料調透明塗層,爲此目的可以使用包含不= 或5百分比游離二十二酸,並經分析約25 2百分比銀之二十4 二酸銀全包。製造銀包分散液之方法於該技藝中爲眾所^ 知,並於1983年10月之研究揭示(23419)和美國專利第 3,985,565號中揭示。 銀鹽錯合物亦可以藉由混合銀離子水物種水溶液,如確 酸銀,和欲與銀錯合之有機配位子之溶液混合而製備。混 合物方法可以採取任何形式,包括^化銀沉澱法中使^ 者。士定劑可以用以避免銀錯合物顆粒絮凝。安定劑可以 疋任何已知可用於照相技藝之材料,例如,但不限於明 膠’聚乙晞醇或聚合物或單體界面活性劑。 感光性_化銀顆粒和有機銀鹽係經塗佈,所以在顯影期 間觸媒近似値内。其能夠以連續層塗佈,但較佳在塗佈前 混合。傳統混合技術係由以上例舉之研究揭示,第17〇29 頁以及美國專利第3,700,458號和公告之日本專利申請第 32928/75, 13224/74, 17216/75 和 42729/76 號説明。 除了經阻斷顯影劑外可以包括還原劑。用於有機銀鹽之 還原劑可以是能夠將銀離子還原爲金屬銀之任何材料,有 機材料較佳。傳統照相顯影劑,如3 ·峨σ坐淀酮,酿,對胺 酉分’對苯一胺和兒茶紛是有用的,但經阻礙紛還原劑較 佳。返原劑較佳以介於光感熱照相層之5至25百分比間之 濃度存在。 在乾燥銀系統中頃揭示各種還原劑,包括醯胺肪類,如 -55- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) ---------· %! (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 幻· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 588213 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(53) 苯醯胺肟,2-嘧醯胺肟和對苯氧-醯胺肟,畊類(例如‘羥_ 3,5-二甲氧苯醛畊);脂肪族羧酸芳基醯啩和抗壞血酸之結 合物’如2,2,_雙(經甲基)丙醯基々苯基醯畊結合抗壞血 酸;聚經基苯和羥基胺之結合物,還原酮和/或畊,例 如,自昆和雙(乙氧乙基)羥基胺之結合物,哌啶己醣還原酮 或甲醯基-4-甲基苯基畊,異羥肟酸或苯異羥肟酸,對羥苯 基-異經Μ酸,和鄰丙胺酸異羥肟酸;畊和磺醯胺酚,例 如’非吟呼和2,6-二氧-4-苯績酿胺紛;&amp;_氰基-苯基乙酸 衍生物,如α _氰基-2-甲基苯基乙酸乙酯,α _氰基·苯基乙 酸乙酯;雙-莕酚,如由2,2,-二羥基-1·二苔基,6,6,-二 溴基-2,2’-二羥基-1,1’-二莕基,和雙(2-羥基莕基)甲烷所 説明;雙-鄰-莕酚和一種1,3_二羥基苯衍生物之結合物, (例如’ 2,4-一技基苯並紛酮或2,4-二經基乙醯紛酮);如^ 苯基-5-吡唑哜之5-吡唑哜;由二甲胺基己糖還原酮,無水 一氫胺基己糖,和供水二氫_六氫ρ比淀酮_己糖還原酮説明 之還原酮;磺醯二胺基酚還原劑,如2,6_二氯苯-磺醯_ 醯胺基-酚,和對苯磺醯醯胺酚;2_苯茚4,3_二酮等等;苯 並二氫哌喃類,如2,2-二甲基-7_三級丁基羥基苯並二氫 哌喃;1,4-二氫吡啶類,如2,6-二甲氧基_3,5•二乙氧羰基_ 1,4-一氫吡哫;雙酚類,例如雙(2-羥基·3-三級丁基-5_甲苯 基)甲烷;2,2-雙(4-羥基-3·曱苯基)·丙烷;4,4•亞乙基·雙(2-三級丁基-6-甲酚);和2,2-雙(3,5-二甲基-4-羥苯基)丙烷; 抗壞血酸衍生物,例如,^棕櫚酸抗壞血酸酯,硬脂酸抗 壞血酸酯和不飽和之醛類和酮類,如苄基和二乙醯基;吡 -56- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規@10 X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) Ρ ·11111111 %·(45) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Consumption Cooperative. 2 Before the speed is defined in a time-defined manner, "the coefficient of contrast relative to the log E (exposure) curve is linearly large or not enlarged to ㈣. The present invention also includes the use of the photographic element of the present invention as a single-use camera (or film with lens unit). These cameras are sold pre-loaded with film and the exposed film is retained The entire camera is returned to the processor in the camera. The single-use camera used in the present invention can be any person known in the art. These cameras can provide specific features known in the art, such as shutter devices, film rolling devices , Push device, waterproof frame, single or multiple lens, lens selection device, variable aperture, focal length lens, device to monitor the lighting environment, adjust the shutter exposure time or according to the lighting environment or the characteristics of the lens provided by the user. And cameras will use a ring mirror to record directly on film. These features include, but are not limited to: Provides manual or automatic slide and reset shutter simplification mechanism as described in US Patent No. 4,226,5 17 of Skarman; provided in US Patent No. 4,345,835 of Matterson et al The automatic exposure control device described; moisture-proof as described in US Pat. No. 4,766,451 of Fujimura etal; provision of internal and external parts as described in US Pat. No. 4,751,536 of Ohmura Film cassette; device for recording use environment on film as described in US Patent No. 4,780,735 by Taniguchi; provided with mounted lens camera as described in US Patent No. 4,804,987 of Arai ; Providing a film support having excellent anti-curling properties as described in US Patent No. 4,827,298 of Sasaki et al; providing a viewfinder as described in US Patent No. 4,812,863 of Omla et al;- 48- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ——— Order · 丨 丨 丨 丨 · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page} 5882 13 A7 B7____ V. Description of the invention (46) Provide a lens with a defined focal length and lens speed as described in US Patent No. 4,812,866 of Ushiro et al; provide the United States of America Nakayama et &amp; 1 Patent Nos. 4,831,398 and Umella &amp; 1 U.S. Patent No. 4,833,495, multiple film containers; provided with Shiba's U.S. Patent No. 4,866,469, films with improved anti-friction characteristics Provide the reeling mechanism, rotating reel, or flexible cassette described in US Patent No. 4,884,087 to Mochida; provide US Patent Nos. 4,890,130 and 5,063,400 to Takei et al A film patrone or a film cassette that can be moved in the axial direction as described in the above; an electronic flash device described in U.S. Patent No. 4,896,178 of Omra et al; and a U.S. Patent No. 4,954,857 provided by Mujida et al Said externally operable member for effective exposure; provided in Murakami U.S. Patent No. 5,049,908, a flexible sheet support having an adjusted pinion gear hole and advancing the soft Device; provided with an internal mirror as described in U.S. Patent No. 5,084,719 to Hara; and provided in European Patent Application No. 0,466,417 A for Yagi etal for use on a tight-winding reel Silver halide emulsion. The film can be mounted in a single-use camera in any manner known in the art, and it is particularly preferred to mount the film in a single-use camera so that the film is pushed into the cassette to begin exposure. The push-in box is made up of U.S. Patent No. 5,226,613 by Kataoka et al; U.S. Patent No. 5,200,777 by Zander; U.S. Patent No. 5,031,852 by Dowling; and Robertson ( (Robertson) et al, U.S. Patent No. 4,834,306. Narrow body single pusher using push-in box in this way -49- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back and fill in this page)- ------ tr --------- Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 588213 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (47) The camera is used by US Patent No. 5,692,221 to Tobika et al. More broadly, the limited-size cameras that are most useful for single-use cameras are generally rectangular in shape and meet the requirements for ease of handling and mobility in, for example, a pocket, when the cameras described herein have a limited volume. The total camera volume should be less than about 45 cubic centimeters (cc), more preferably less than 380 cc, more preferably less than 300 cc, and most preferably less than 22 cc. In order to provide comfortable grip and fit in a pocket, the depth-height-length ratio of this camera will usually be about 1: 2: 4, each range is about 25%. Usually the minimum usable depth is set by the focal length of the combined lens and the size of the combined film reel and filmmaker. Cameras usually prefer a radius of curvature of most corners and edges between about 0.2 and 3 cm. The use of a push-in cassette provides a special advantage of the present invention 'in that it provides a simple scanning method for a photographic transported object on a roll, on the one hand, protecting the film from dust, scratches, and abrasion, all of which tend to degrade image quality. ′ While any known finder lens can be used in the camera of the present invention, the single-use framing lens mounted on the single-use camera of the present invention is preferably a single non-shaped plastic lens. The focal length of these lenses will be between about 10 and 100 mm, and the lens aperture will be between f / 2 and f / 32. The focal length is preferably between about 15 and 60 mm, and most preferably between about 20 and 40 mm. Regarding painting applications, the focal length is better than 25% of the exposure area of the rectangular film. The second lens aperture between f / 28 * f / 22 includes lens apertures of about f / 4 to f / 16. In the film plane lens, the MTF can be as low as 〇6 with a frequency of 20 lines per millimeter (1 pm). Although the volume includes 咼 like 0.7 or the best 0.8 or higher. Higher The lens MTF 値 allows for sharper images. In particular, it includes two types, three == ___ -50- This paper size is applicable to the Chinese national standard (〇sfS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) 丨 丨 丨--- ----- Order --------- 丨 · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) V. Description of the invention (48) More functional-the multi-lens arrangement of the component lens. ; == Built-in processing capability, such as heating elements. This 9;,; = The design of the image capture and display system is based on Ru Ru, the patent is described in the Wu patent, please serial number 009 / 388,573 = The disclosure of the use of the single-use camera in the practice of the present invention especially includes the use of any known technique for full-image exposure, as disclosed in Section XVI. This typically includes exposure, and Light, this exposure is typically a vivid shadow through a lens ^, although exposure can also use light emitting devices (such as Volume, crt, etc.) are exposed to stored images (such as computer storage images). Photothermographic elements also use various energy forms to expose 'including the ultraviolet and infrared regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, as well as electron beam and krypton radiation, r-rays, X · Rays, & particles, neutron radiation, and non-homogeneous (arbitrary phase) or homogeneous (in-phase) particle wavy radiant energy produced by laser. Exposure is monochromatic, monochromatic, or panchromatic Depending on the spectral sensitivity of the photographic silver halide. The elements discussed above can be used as the starting material for some or all of the following processing: image scanning produces an electronic interpretation of the captured image, which is then digitally processed for electronic operation , Store, transmit, output 'or display the image. The barrier compound of the present invention can be used in photographic elements including any or all of the above characteristics, but is expected to be used in different processing forms. These system forms will be described in detail below. Forms I: Thermal processing system (thermal green and light thermal photography), of which -51-This paper size is applicable to Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 Gongchu) A7 V. Description of the invention (49) B7 Printing and processing by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is started by applying heat to the developing element. Form II: Low-volume system 'Where the film processing is started, but the processing is assisted by contact processing, such as the processing force, including the addition of non-solution processing, such as heat or lamination applied during the processing time. Form III: Traditional camera system , Its photo, φ, Qin, Yu; 4, by contact with the traditional '/ wash processing, the volume of such solutions is very large compared to% &gt; volume. State branch in the layer (form I · Thermally sensitive green and photothermographic systems According to one aspect of the present invention, the blocked developer is incorporated in a photo-salt thermographic π. The study reveals the photothermographic format described in 17㈣ and is available for reference. The photothermographic element may be a type A or a type B as described in the research revealing process. The type A element contains a photosensitive silver-based reactivator or developer, a activator, and a coating medium or a binder. In these systems, development occurs by reducing silver ions in inductive silver to metallic silver. The B-type system can contain all elements of the A-type system in addition to salts or complexes of organic compounds and silver ions. In these systems, this organic complex is reduced during development to produce silver metal. The organic silver salt will be referred to as a silver precursor. References describing such developing elements include, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 3,457,057; 4,459,350; 4,264,725 and 4,741,992. The photothermographic element includes a photosensitive component which consists essentially of a photographic silver halide. In the B-type photothermographic material, the latent image silver derived from self-chemical silver is used as a catalyst for the imaging combination when processed. In these -52- this paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) ^ 9 ------- Order ---------% 1 · (Please read first Note on the back, please fill out this page again) 588213 A7 B7-------- 丨-V. Description of the Invention (50) In the system, the photo is taken in the photothermographic material. The ear silver body is in the range of 100 to 100 moles of silver halide. Type B photothermographic elements include a redox imaging conjugate containing an organic silver salt oxidant. Organic silver salt is a kind of silver salt, which is relatively singular to light, but when heated to 80 ° C or high temperature in the presence of an exposed photocatalyst (ie, photosensitive silver halide) and a reducing agent, it helps to form a silver image . Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ------- Order: (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Appropriate organic silver salts include carboxyl groups Silver salts of organic compounds. Preferable examples thereof include salts of an aliphatic polyacid and silver salts of an aromatic acid. Preferred examples of silver salts of aliphatic carboxylic acids include silver behenate, silver stearate, silver oleate, silver laurate, silver decanoate, silver myristate, silver palmitate, and maleic acid. Silver acid, silver fumarate, silver tartrate, silver furoate, silver mulberry acid, silver butyrate, and silver malate, mixtures thereof, and the like. Silver salts substituted with halogen elements or hydroxyl groups can also be effectively used. Preferable examples of the aromatic quinic acid and other compound-containing silver salts include silver benzoate, substituted silver benzoate, such as silver 3,5-dihydroxybenzoate, silver o-fluorenylbenzoate, m-formyl Silver benzoate, semi-p-methylbenzoate, silver 2,4-digas benzoate, silver acetamide, silver p-phenylbenzoate, etc., silver gallic acid, silver tannin, gj; Acid silver, silver terephthalate, silver salicylate, silver acetoacetate, silver pyromellitic acid, 3-carboxymethyl-4-methyl-4-pyrazolin 2.thione or as U.S. Patent No. 3,785,830 Analogs described in No. 3, and silver salts of aliphatic carboxylic acids as described in U.S. Patent No. 3,330,663. In particular, silver salts of compounds substituted with thiol or thioketones have a heterocyclic nucleus containing 5 or 6 ring atoms, at least one of which is nitrogen, and other ring atoms include carbon, and up to two selected from oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen. Heteroatom. It is typically -53- This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (51) Good heterocyclic nuclei include triazole, &quot; sedazole, thiazoline, Pyrimazole, Pyramid Sit, Two Sit, Sit cold one (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) and Erqian. Examples of these heterocyclic compounds include the silver salt of winter soil 2,4-diazole, the silver salt of 2-mercaptopyrazole, the silver salt of 2-sulfo: 5 · amine 4 diamidine, 2_ (2 · B Ethylene glycol donkey amine) silver salt of benzopyrene 'Ί1 :: Silver salt of phenyl-2 · phenyl-4-pyrene, silver salt of succinic acid' 2-green winter and P number TT sitting phase The silver salt of t | ° '丨, 2,4-pyrtriazole derivative in U.S. Patent No. 4,123,274, such as 3-amino-5, ^^ 3_ ^ 6 ΐ: diΓ ...- sulfur Ketone silver salts, such as U.S. Patent No. 3, _ Heterocyclic nucleus-containing thiol or copper sulfide substitution: "Useful" The example is as follows: silver salt of thioacetic acid, such as S-burn, silver salt of ethano ( Wherein the calcined group has _ carbons, as described in Application No. 28221/73, a silver salt of a dithiocarboxylic acid, such as a silver salt of dithioacetic acid and a silver salt of thiamidine. Imine: Silver salt of a compound. Preferred examples of these compounds include silver salts of benzotris (3) derivatives,% printed by Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs = No. 027/69 and- As described in, for example, benzotris. Instead of silver benzotritonate, such as 5. silver benzotriwa silver salt, etc., U, 4-tri-salt silver salt, 3. amine hydrazone], 2,4_tri slave silver salt 'is a US patent No. 4,22〇, Xiezhongzhongjin ... H-tetrazole'pyrazole and silver salts of pyrimazole derivatives, and the like. It is also found that silver half I is used, in which by Mortar ginseng blends such as sodium behenate were prepared by reducing precipitation in sleeping water, and analyzed about M ″ -54- This paper size is suitable for financial standards (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) Chu 213 A7- --------- ---_ B7___ V. Description of the invention (52) ~ '~ Percentage silver, which is a preferred example. The transparent thin-film material tuned transparent coating manufactured on the transparent film lining is For this purpose, it is possible to use all-inclusive silver-tetracosamate containing no = or 5 percent free behenic acid and analyzing about 25 2 percent silver. The method of making a silver-clad dispersion is well known in the art ^ And disclosed in the research of October 1983 (23419) and U.S. Patent No. 3,985,565. The silver salt complex can also be mixed with silver ion water species aqueous solution, such as silver acid, and the complex with silver. The solution of organic ligands is prepared by mixing. The method of mixing can take any form, including the silver precipitation method. The stabilizer can be used to avoid flocculation of the silver complex particles. The stabilizer can be any known available Materials for photographic technology, such as, but not limited to, gelatin 'polyethylene glycol or polymers or monomeric surfactants. Photosensitivity_Silver particles and organic silver salts are coated, so the catalyst is approximately the same during development. It can be applied in a continuous layer, but it is preferably mixed before coating. The traditional mixing technology is revealed by the research exemplified above, page 1729, and US Patent No. 3,700,458 and published Japanese Patent Application No. 32928 / 75, 13224/74, 17216/75 and 42729/76. A reducing agent may be included in addition to the blocked developer. The reducing agent for the organic silver salt may be any material capable of reducing silver ions to metallic silver, and an organic material is preferred. Conventional photographic developers, such as sigmazolide, are useful for amines, p-phenylamine and catechins, but are better for reducing agents. The reversion agent is preferably present at a concentration between 5 and 25 percent of the photothermographic layer. Various reducing agents were revealed in the dry silver system, including ammonium fats, such as -55- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (21〇X 297 mm) --------- · %! (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed by 588213 A7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, 5. Description of the Invention (53) Amphoxime , 2-pyrimoxime oxime and p-phenoxy-amidooxime, cultivated species (for example, 'hydroxy_ 3,5-dimethoxybenzaldehyde cultivation); a combination of an aliphatic carboxylic acid aryl amidine and ascorbic acid' such as 2,2, _Bis (methyl) propanyl, phenyl, phenyl, and ascorbic acid; a combination of polyphenylene and hydroxylamine, reducing ketones, and / or cultivating, for example, from Kun and bis (ethoxyethyl) ) Hydroxyamine conjugates, piperidine hexose reducing ketone or methyl-4-methylphenyl, hydroxamic acid or phenylhydroxamic acid, p-hydroxyphenyl-isohydroxamic acid, and ortho Alanine hydroxamic acid; Teng and sulfamethoxols, such as' non-groin and 2,6-dioxo-4-phenylamine amines; &amp; _ cyano-phenylacetic acid derivatives, such as α _ Cyano Ethyl-2-methylphenylacetate, α-cyano · phenylethylacetate; bis-fluorenol, such as from 2,2, -dihydroxy-1 · dimosyl, 6,6, -dibromo -2,2'-dihydroxy-1,1'-difluorenyl, and bis (2-hydroxyfluorenyl) methane; bis-o-o-phenol and a 1,3-dihydroxybenzene derivative Conjugates (for example, '2,4-monobenzophenone or 2,4-dienylacetone); such as ^ 5-pyrazolidine of phenyl-5-pyrazolidine; Methylaminohexose reducing ketones, anhydrous monohydroaminohexose, and reducing ketones as described by water dihydro_hexahydroρbitalone_hexose reducing ketones; sulfofluorenediamine phenol reducing agents, such as 2,6 _Dichlorobenzene-sulfofluorenyl_ fluorenylamino-phenol, and p-toluenesulfanilide; 2-benzindene 4,3_dione, etc .; benzodihydropiranes, such as 2,2-bis Methyl-7-tert-butylhydroxybenzodihydropiran; 1,4-dihydropyridines, such as 2,6-dimethoxy-3,5 • diethoxycarbonyl-1,4-a Hydropyridine; bisphenols, such as bis (2-hydroxy · 3-tertiarybutyl-5-tolyl) methane; 2,2-bis (4-hydroxy-3 · fluorenyl) · propane; 4, 4 • Ethylene · bis (2-tertiarybutyl-6-cresol); and 2,2-bis ( 3,5-dimethyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propane; ascorbic acid derivatives, for example, ascorbyl palmitate, ascorbyl stearate, and unsaturated aldehydes and ketones, such as benzyl and diacetamidine Base; Py-56- This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Regulation @ 10 X 297 Public Love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Ρ · 11111111% ·

588213 五、發明說明(54) 唾啶-3-酮;和某些氫茚-丨,夂二酮。 光感熱照相元件中有機還原劑 θ 7 d &lt;取佳濃度視因子而改 變,如光感熱照相元件,希望之與 叩主 &lt; 衫像,沖洗加工環境,特 定之有機銀鹽和特定之氧化劑。 光感熱7G件能夠包括調和劑,亦已知爲活化劑調色劑或 調色劑促進劑。調色劑結合物亦有用於光感熱照相元件。 有用調色劑和調色劑結合物之實例係於例如研究揭示, ㈣年6月,第17029號項目和美國專利第4,123,282號中叙 述。有用〈調色劑實例包括,例如,$二甲醯胺亞胺,N_ 羥苯二甲醯胺亞胺,N-鉀·苯二甲醯胺亞胺,丁二醯亞 胺,N-^-l,8-莕二曱醯亞胺,酞畊,卜(2H)‘畊酮,2_乙 醯酞畊酮,水楊醯苯胺,苯甲醯胺,和二甲脲。 後沖洗加工影像安定劑和潛影保持安定劑有用於光感熱 照相元件。任何光感熱照相技藝中已知安定劑有用於所述 之光感熱照相元件。有用之安定劑説明實例包括例如美國 專利第4,459,350號中所述之光解活性安定劑和安定劑先 質。其它有用安定劑之實例包括吡咯乙硫醚和經阻斷 azolinethione安定劑先質和胺甲醯基安定劑先質,如美國 專利第3,877,940號中所述般。 光感熱照相元件較佳單獨包含各種膠體和聚合物或與如 媒液和黏合劑結合,或於各種層中。有用之材料爲親水性 或疏水性。其爲透明或半透明,且包括天然發生之物質, 如明膠,明膠衍生物,纖維素衍生物,多醣體,如聚葡萄 糖,阿拉伯膠等等;及合成聚合物物質,如水溶性聚乙締 -57- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) — — — ·· I ·訂··1·- -· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 ____ B7_____ 五、發明說明(S5) 基化合物,如聚(乙晞吡咯啶酮)和丙晞醯胺聚合物。其它 有用之合成聚合化合物包括經分散乙烯基化合物,如乳膠 形式,尤指提高照相元件尺寸安定度者。有效之聚合物包 括丙烯酸酯,如烷基丙晞酸酯和甲基丙晞酸酯,丙晞酸, 磺基丙烯酸酯之水不溶性聚合物,及具有交聯位置者。較 佳之高分子量材料和樹脂包括聚(乙晞丁醛),纖維素乙酸 酉旨丁酸醋’聚(甲基丙締酸甲g旨),聚(乙烯P比P各淀酮),乙 晞纖維素,聚苯乙晞,聚首氣乙晞),氣化橡膠,聚異丁 烯,丁二烯-苯乙晞共聚物,氣乙烯和乙酸乙晞酯之共聚 物,氣亞乙烯和乙酸乙烯酯之共聚物,聚(乙晞醇)和聚碳 酸酯。當塗料係使用有機溶劑製成時,有機可溶性·樹脂可 以藉由直接混合於塗料調配物中而塗佈。當自水溶液塗佈 時,可以將任何有用之有機可溶性材料可以如乳膠或其它 細喊顆粒分散液般參混。 所述之光感熱照相元件能夠包含已知有助於形成有用影 像之附加物。光感熱照相元件能夠包含顯影調整劑,其機 能爲速度提高化合物,感光染料,硬化劑,抗靜電劑,增 塑劑和潤滑劑,塗料助劑,增亮劑,吸收和過滤染料,如 研究揭示,1978號12月項目第17643號和研究揭示,1978年 6月項目第17029號中敘述。 光感;^照相元件層係以照相技藝中已知之塗佈步驟塗佈 於支#體上,包括浸潰塗佈,空氣刀塗佈,簾塗佈或使用 加料漏斗之擠製塗佈。必要時,可以同時塗佈二層或多 層。 p •58' 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)588213 V. Description of the invention (54) Salidin-3-one; and certain hydroindenes, fluorenediones. The organic reducing agent θ 7 d in the photothermographic element depends on the optimum concentration, such as the photothermographic element, and it is hoped that it will be compatible with the host &lt; shirt image, processing environment, specific organic silver salt and specific oxidant . The heat-sensitive 7G piece can include a conditioner, which is also known as an activator toner or a toner accelerator. Toner combinations are also useful in photothermographic elements. Examples of useful toners and toner combinations are described, for example, in Research Disclosure, June of next year, item 17029 and U.S. Patent No. 4,123,282. Examples of useful toners include, for example, dimethylformamide imine, N-hydroxybenzidine imine, N-potassium xylylenediamine imine, succinimide, N-^- 1,8-pyridine diimide, phthalocyanine, bu (2H) 'phytonone, 2-ethyl acetophthalone, salicylanilide, benzamidine, and dimethyl urea. Post-processed image stabilizers and latent image retention stabilizers are useful for photothermographic elements. Stabilizers known in any photothermography technique are useful for the photothermographic element. Illustrative examples of useful stabilizers include, for example, photolytically active stabilizers and stabilizer precursors as described in U.S. Patent No. 4,459,350. Examples of other useful stabilizers include pyrrole ethyl sulfide and blocked azolinethione stabilizer precursors and carbamate stabilizers, as described in U.S. Patent No. 3,877,940. The photothermographic element preferably contains various colloids and polymers alone or in combination with, for example, a vehicle and a binder, or in various layers. Useful materials are hydrophilic or hydrophobic. It is transparent or translucent and includes naturally occurring substances such as gelatin, gelatin derivatives, cellulose derivatives, polysaccharides such as polydextrose, acacia, etc .; and synthetic polymer materials such as water-soluble polyethylene- 57- This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 public love) — — — · · · · · · · · · · · · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Economy Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 588213 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ____ B7_____ 5. Description of the invention (S5) -based compounds, such as poly (ethylpyrrolidone) and propylammonium polymer Other useful synthetic polymeric compounds include dispersed vinyl compounds, such as in the form of latexes, especially those that increase the dimensional stability of photographic elements. Effective polymers include acrylates such as alkylpropionate and methylpropionate, propionate, water-insoluble polymers of sulfoacrylate, and those having cross-linked sites. Preferred high molecular weight materials and resins include poly (acetonitrile), cellulose acetate, butyric acid, poly (methylpropionate), poly (ethylene P to P, each ketone), and ethyl acetate. Cellulose, polystyrene, polyethylenic acid), gasified rubber, polyisobutylene, butadiene-styrene copolymer, gaseous ethylene and ethyl acetate acetate, gaseous ethylene and vinyl acetate Copolymers, poly (acetol) and polycarbonate. When the coating is made of an organic solvent, the organic soluble resin can be applied by directly mixing it with the coating formulation. When applied from an aqueous solution, any useful organic soluble material can be blended like a latex or other fine particle dispersion. The photothermographic element can contain additives known to help form a useful image. Photothermographic elements can contain development modifiers that function as speed increasing compounds, photosensitizing dyes, hardeners, antistatic agents, plasticizers and lubricants, coating additives, brighteners, absorption and filter dyes, as revealed by research No. 17743 of December Project No. 1978 and research revealed that it was described in No. 17029 of June 1978 Project. Photosensitive element layers are applied to the support by coating steps known in the photographic art, including dip coating, air knife coating, curtain coating, or extrusion coating using an addition funnel. If necessary, two or more layers may be applied simultaneously. p • 58 'This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

ϋ ϋ ϋ ϋ -H ϋ^OJ· —Bi 1· 1 I % 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(56) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 所述之光感熱照相元件較佳包括一種熱安定劑,以幫助 在曝光和沖洗加工將光感熱照相元件安定化。此一熱安定 劑提供貯存期間光感熱照相元件之安定性。較佳之熱安定 劑爲2-溴-2-芳磺基乙醯醯胺,如2-溴-2-對-甲苯磺醯基乙 醯醯胺;2_(三溴曱磺醯基)苯並嘧唑;和6-取代-2,4-雙(三 溪甲基)-二級三畊,如6_甲基或6_苯基-2,4_雙(三溴甲基)· 二級三p井。 全影像曝光較佳持續一段時間,且強度足以在光感熱照 相元件中產生可顯影之潛影。 在光感熱照相元件全影像曝光後,產生之潛影能夠以各 種方式顯影。最簡單係將元件整體加熱至熱沖洗加工溫 度。此整體加熱僅包括將光感熱照相元件加熱至約9〇。〇至約 18(TC範圍内之溫度,直到形成顯影影像,如在約〇 5至約 6〇秒内。ϋ由提高或降低熱沖洗加工溫度,独或較長沖 洗加工時間是有用⑸。較佳熱沖洗加工溫度係在約就 ^約160°C範圍内。光感熱照相技#中已知之加 ^用於提供已曝光光感熱照相元件希望之理溫度:加散裝 '=,係種簡單加熱板1斗’輕,加熱桶,微波 加為裝置,加熱空氣,蒸氣等等。 預期用於光感熱照相元件之沖洗 之+ —,七厂斗、、凡、丄i 加工器設計與用於儲存 &lt;卡式或匣式設計和該元件之用途 片或11上之數據可以用以調整元件、、、:、。此外,儲存軟 描。完成這些顯影系統内步驟之方,'、洗加工條件或掃 之美國專利序號第09/206586號和美國*於—般頒布’共懸 邗美國專利第6,062,746號和 -59- 本紙張尺度週用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21G X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) %ϋ ϋ ϋ H -H ϋ ^ OJ · —Bi 1 · 1 I% 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (56) The photothermographic element printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs preferably includes a thermal stability Agents to help stabilize the photothermographic elements during exposure and processing. This thermal stabilizer provides the stability of a photothermographic element during storage. The preferred thermal stabilizer is 2-bromo-2-arylsulfoacetamidine, such as 2-bromo-2-p-toluenesulfonylacetamide; 2- (tribromosulfanyl) benzopyrimidine Azole; and 6-substituted-2,4-bis (trifluoromethyl) -secondary triple farming, such as 6-methyl or 6_phenyl-2,4_bis (tribromomethyl) · secondary triple p well. The full-image exposure preferably lasts for a period of time and is strong enough to produce a developable latent image in the light-sensitive thermal imaging element. The latent image produced after the whole image of the photothermographic element is exposed can be developed in various ways. The simplest is to heat the entire component to the hot processing temperature. This overall heating only includes heating the photothermographic element to about 90. Temperatures in the range of 0 to about 18 ° C, until a developed image is formed, such as in about 0.05 to about 60 seconds. It is useful to increase or decrease the temperature of the thermal processing process, and it is useful to increase or decrease the processing time. The best thermal processing temperature is in the range of about 160 ° C. Additions known in photothermography # are used to provide the exposed photothermographic elements. The desired temperature: add bulk '=, simple heating Plate 1 bucket 'light, heating barrel, microwave addition device, heating air, steam, etc. It is expected to be used for the development of photothermographic elements +-, 7 factory bucket, fan, 丄 i processors designed and used for storage &lt; Cassette or cassette design and the use of the element or the data on 11 can be used to adjust the element ,,,:,. In addition, to store soft traces. To complete the steps in these development systems, ', processing conditions Or Scanned U.S. Patent No. 09/206586 and U.S.A. * Issued 'Co-suspension U.S. Patent Nos. 6,062,746 and -59- This paper uses Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (21G X 297) ) (Please read the notes on the back before filling (This page)%

i^i ϋ I n 1-^δ,,i n I ϋ ϋ I %. 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(57) 第6,048,110號。使用一種裝置,其中該沖洗加工器能夠用 以將資訊寫錄於元件上,亦面對能夠用以調整沖洗加工, 掃描和影像顯示之資訊。此系統係於2〇〇〇年6月14日公告 之歐洲專利第1,008,901號和1999年6月丨5日頒布之美國專二 申請序號第09/333,092號中揭示。 熱沖洗加工較佳在周圍環境之壓力和濕度下進行。除正 常大氣壓和濕度外之環境是有用的。 光感熱照相之組份能夠在元件内任何位置,其提供希望 I影像。必要時,一個或多個組份能夠在一個或多個件層 中。例如,在-些例子中,希望在元件之光感熱照相影像 記錄層上包括某百分比之還原劑,調色劑,安定劑和/或 其它附加物。在-些例子中,此降低元件層中某些附加物 之遷移。 根據本發明之一個觀點,該經阻斷顯影劑係參混於光感 熱照相元件中。在感熱記錄元件中,影像係以全影像加熱 該元間而形成。此類元件係述於例如研究揭示,KM年6 月,項目第17029號和美國專利第3,_,254號,第3,457,〇75 號和第3,933,508號中敘述。用於顯影之熱能來源和裝置能 夠是感熱記綠元技藝中已知之任何全影像熱曝光來源和裝 置。感熱記錄影像裝能夠是,例如,紅外線加熱裝置,雷 射,微波加熱裝置或類似物。 田 形式Π:低體積沖洗加工: 根據本發日m觀點’該經阻斷顯影劑係參混於用於 低體積沖洗加工之照相元件中。低體積沖洗加工係定義爲 _ -60· Σ紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格⑵〇 x 297公爱) —---- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂--------- % 哪213 A7 五、 發明說明(58) ===液之體積介於將照相元件潤脹所需之溶液 c請先聞讀背面之江意事頊再填寫本頁〕 1〇件· ,” 1〇倍心間(沖洗加工,較佳爲約0.5至約 此沖洗加工可以以溶液應用,内層層合,和加熱之 二、:·取代‘低體積沖洗加工系統可以包含任何以上形式1 = 感熱照相系統。此外,尤其包括任何前面 件:二t了進行照相沖洗加工之目的,原始軟片元 形成或安定度不需要之組份,能夠使用下述之 万法从片π件全部移除,並在曝錢任何時間接觸。 形式II照相元件可以接受一些或全部以下處理: (I) 以任何裝置將溶液直接應用於軟片,包括喷霧,喷 墨,塗佈,凹版印刷法等等。 (II) 將軟片浸泡於包含沖洗液之貯液器中。此方法亦可 以採用浸潰或將元件通過小匣之形式。 %· (III) 將輔助沖洗加工元件層壓於顯影元件。層壓可以具 有提供沖洗加工化學,移除已使用化學,或將影像 資訊從潛影記綠軟片元件轉移之目的。已轉移=像 可以源自以全影像方式轉移至輔助沖洗加工元件之 染料’染料先質,或含銀化合物。 (IV) 以合宜裝置加熱,包括簡單加熱板,熨斗,輥,加 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 熱桶,微波加熱裝置,加熱空氣,蒸氣等等。加熱 可以在前述沖洗加工MII項中任一項之前,期間^ 之後或整個期間完成。加熱可以使沖洗加工溫度介 於室溫至l〇(TC之間。 狐又)' 形式III :傳統系統: -61 - 588213 五、發明說明(59) 根據本發明之另一颧鞔,# ^ 照相元件中。 係、將該經阻斷顯影劑摻入傳統 根據本發明之傳統照相元件 統照相沖洗液之任一種,例如於研究吏 約,麥克西蘭(MaCmillan),由編者τη^,或1977年,紐 理(The Theorv nf Ph · · &amp; 姆士 &lt; lUli去原 第4版中所述,以 4夕眾所周知&lt;照相法之任一種 叮、以 行適於得到可接受影像之任 L σ 。㈣法可以進 度。在這些例中,可在 _ 』加工冲冼酿 元件内一個亦夕 發月又經阻斷顯影劑以提供 cm到較短顯影時間内改良之信號,或降低 ,u,又仔幻所有彩色记錄平衡顯影。以加工沖 洗負片作品元件而論,該元件係經彩色顯影劑(即一種將 形成具彩色偶合劑之彩色影像染料)處理,接著以氧化劑 和溶劑處理’以移除銀和由化銀。以加工沖洗逆色元件而 郝’这疋件首先經黑白顯影劑(即一種不形成具偶合劑化 合物之彩色染料之顯影劑)處理,繼之朦霧鹵化銀(經常爲 化學性朦霧或光朦霧)’接著以彩色顯影劑處理。較佳之 彩色顯影劑爲對苯二胺。尤其較佳爲: 4-胺基-Ν,Ν-二乙苯胺氫氣化物, 4-胺基-3-甲基-Ν,Ν-二乙苯胺氫氣化物, 4-胺基-3-甲基-Ν-乙基-Ν-(2-(甲烷磺醯醯胺基)乙苯胺焦 硫酸鹽水合物, 4-胺基-3-甲基-Ν-乙基-Ν_(2-羥乙基)硫酸苯胺, -62- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)i ^ i ϋ I n 1- ^ δ ,, i n I ϋ ϋ I%. 588213 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (57) No. 6,048,110. A device is used in which the processor can be used to write information on the component, and it can also be used to adjust the processing, scanning and image display information. This system is disclosed in European Patent No. 1,008,901, published on June 14, 2000, and US Patent Application Serial No. 09 / 333,092, issued June 5, 1999. The thermal processing is preferably performed under the pressure and humidity of the surrounding environment. Environments other than normal atmospheric pressure and humidity are useful. The photothermographic component can be located anywhere within the element, which provides the desired image. If necessary, one or more components can be in one or more pieces. For example, in some examples, it is desirable to include a percentage of reducing agent, toner, stabilizer, and / or other additives on the photothermographic image recording layer of the element. In some examples, this reduces the migration of certain add-ons in the component layer. According to an aspect of the present invention, the blocked developer is incorporated in a photothermographic element. In a thermal recording element, an image is formed by heating the cell with a full image. Such elements are described, for example, in Research Disclosure, June KM, Project No. 17029, and U.S. Patent Nos. 3, _, 254, 3,457,075, and 3,933,508. The thermal energy source and device used for development can be any full-image thermal exposure source and device known in the art of thermal recording. The thermal recording image device can be, for example, an infrared heating device, a laser, a microwave heating device or the like. Form Π: Low-volume processing: According to the viewpoint of the present day, the blocked developer is incorporated in a photographic element for low-volume processing. Low-volume processing is defined as _ -60 · Σ paper size applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications ⑵〇x 297 public love) —---- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order- --------% Which 213 A7 V. Description of the invention (58) === The volume of the liquid is between the solutions needed to swell the photographic element c Please read the Jiang Yishi on the back before filling in this Page] 10 pieces, "" 10 times the heart (rinsing process, preferably about 0.5 to about this. The washing process can be applied as a solution, the inner layer is laminated, and the heating is the second one :: instead of the 'low volume washing processing system' It can include any of the above forms 1 = Thermal camera system. In addition, it includes any front parts in particular: for the purpose of photographic processing, the components that are not required for the formation or stability of the original soft film can be used from the following methods All film pieces are removed and contacted at any time during exposure. Form II photographic elements can accept some or all of the following treatments: (I) Apply the solution directly to the film using any device, including spray, inkjet, coating, Gravure printing, etc. (II) Immerse the film in a bag Rinse solution in the reservoir. This method can also take the form of dipping or passing the component through a small box.% · (III) Laminating the auxiliary processing element on the developing element. The lamination can provide processing chemistry, transfer Except for the purpose of using chemistry, or transferring image information from the latent image green film elements. Transferred = image can be derived from the dye 'dye precursor, or silver-containing compound that can be transferred to the auxiliary processing element in a full-image manner. IV) Appropriate heating equipment, including simple heating plates, irons, rollers, printed thermal barrels by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, microwave heating equipment, heating air, steam, etc. Heating can be in the aforementioned processing MII Before any period, after the period ^, or the entire period is completed. Heating can make the processing temperature between room temperature and 10 (TC. Fox again) 'Form III: Traditional system: -61-588213 V. Description of the invention ( 59) According to another aspect of the present invention, # ^ is used in a photographic element. The blocked developer is incorporated into a conventional photographic processing solution of the conventional photographic element according to the present invention. One, for example, in the research covenant, MaCmillan, edited by the editor τη ^, or in 1977, The Theorv nf Ph · · &amp; Mu Si &lt; lUli goes to the original 4th edition, with It is well known that any one of the photographic methods is suitable for obtaining any image L σ. The method can be progressed. In these examples, it is possible to produce a month within the processing of the brewing element. After blocking the developer to provide a signal of improvement from cm to a shorter development time, or to reduce, u, and then develop all color recording balanced development. In terms of processing and processing negative film elements, this element is a color developer (Ie, a color imaging dye that will form a color coupling agent), and then treated with an oxidizing agent and a solvent to remove silver and silver. Hao 'was first processed with a black-and-white developer (that is, a developer that does not form a color dye with a coupling compound), followed by a haze of silver halide (often chemical haze or light Haze) 'followed by treatment with a color developer. A preferred color developer is p-phenylenediamine. Especially preferred are: 4-amino-N, N-diethylaniline hydrogenate, 4-amino-3-methyl-N, N-diethylaniline hydrogenate, 4-amino-3-methyl- N-ethyl-N- (2- (methanesulfonamido) ethylaniline pyrosulfate hydrate, 4-amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N_ (2-hydroxyethyl) sulfuric acid Aniline, -62- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

^1 ϋ I 一: 口,· ϋ I I I ϋ I n I %- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(60 ) 4-胺基-3-α -(甲烷磺醯醯胺基)乙基-N,N-二乙苯胺氫氣化 物,和 4-胺基-N-乙基曱氧乙基)-間甲苯胺二-對二甲苯磺 酸。 染料影像夠藉由使用產生染料影像還原劑,惰性過渡金 屬離子錯合物氧化劑,如比頌淫特(Biss〇nette)之美國專利 第 3,748,138,3,826,652,3,862,842 及 3,989,526 號和崔維斯 (Travis)之美國專利第3,765,891號所説明般,和/或過氧化 物氧化劑之結合物之方法形成或放大,如馬特傑(Matejec) 之美國專利第3,764,490號,研究揭示,第116册,1973年12 月,第11660項,和比頌涅特研究揭示,第148册,1976年8 月,第14836,14846和14847項所説明般。尤其能夠採用照 相元件以藉由如以下所説明之方法形成染料影像··丹恩 (Dunn)et al之美國專利第3,822,129號,比頌涅特之美國專 利第3,834,907和3,902,905號,比頌涅特之美國專利第 3,847,619號,莫瑞(Mowrey)之美國專利第3,904,413號,海 瑞(Hirai) et al之美國專利第4,880,725號,依瓦諾(Iwano)之 美國專利第4,954,425號’馬司登(Marsden) et al之美國專 利第4,983,504號’伊凡斯(Evans) et al之美國專利第 5,246,822號,崔司特(Twist)之美國專利第5,324,624號,法 森(Fyson)之歐洲專利第EPO 〇 487 616號,坦那喜爾 (丁3111^11丨11)6〖&amp;1之世界專利第貿〇 90/ 13059號,馬司登之世 界專利第WO 90/ 13061號’葛利西(Grimsey) et al之世界專 利第WO 91/ 16666號,法森之世界專利第w〇 91/ 17479號, •63- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -------訂--------- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 588213 A7 五、發明說明(61) 馬司登et al之世界專利第w〇 92/〇1972號,坦那喜爾之世 界專利第W0 92/〇5471號,漢森(Hens〇n)之世界專利第w〇 92/〇7299號,崔斯特之世界專利第冒〇93/〇1524號和第界〇 93/ 11460號,及溫格德(wingender) et al之德國專利第〇LS 4,211,460 號。 顯影後可以是漂白定影,移除銀或鹵化銀,清洗和 燥。 一旦黃,紫紅,和青色染料影像記錄頃於本發明之經沖 洗加工元件中形成,能夠使用傳統技術修補各彩色記=之 影像資訊,並變換其後產生可看到彩色平衡影像之記錄。 例如,能夠在光譜藍,綠和紅色區域内連續掃描照相元 件,或在單-掃描光束内捧入藍,綠和紅色光,該光束被 區分並通過藍,綠和紅色遽鏡,形成各彩色記錄之分離掃 描光束。一種簡單技術係沿分枝平行掃描路徑列一點一點 地掃描該照相元件。以感應!!記下掃描點上光通過元件之 強度,感應器將接收到之輕射轉變爲電子信號。此電子俨 號最常進-步經變換,形成有用之影像電子記綠。例如 電子信號能夠通過類比數位(anal〇g七·叫㈣)轉換器,並 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) %· 與影像内像素(點)位置所需之位置資訊一起送至數位電 腦。在另一具體實施例中,此電子信號經色度計或色=資 訊編碼而形成電子記錄,其適於容許影像再建構爲可看到 的^式,如電腦監視器顯*之影像,電視影像,列印之影 像等等。 預期許多本發明之顯影元件將在由化銀自元件被移除前 64- ^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 、發明說明(62) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 掃描:剩下的齒化銀產生一種濃喃塗層,咸發現此 义改良掃描影像品質能夠藉由利用使用擴散昭明光與’、、搞 =器得到。能夠使用該技藝中用於產生擴散照明之= ^。較佳之系統包括反射系統,其使用内壁經特殊設 產生高度擴散反射之擴散孔,和透射系統, = 先束中用以漫射光線之光學元件完成鏡射光光束之擴散。 此類元件能夠是玻璃或塑膠,其或摻入產生所需漫射1組 份,或頃經表面處理以促進所需之漫射。 、、 從藉由掃描選萃之資訊產生影像時遭遇的一個挑戰在於 觀f可使用之資訊像素數目僅從相當基本照相茚片可使用 =邵份。因此,掃描顯影以使可使用影像資訊品質成爲最 高甚至更爲重要。提高影像銳度並將異常像素信號(即雜 =)衝擊降至最低是提高影像品質常見之研究。一種將異 常像素信號衝擊降至最低之傳統技術係藉由分解鄰近像素 足讀數,越靠近之鄰近像素更加重加權,而將各像素密度 讀數調整至權重平均値。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本發明之元件能夠具有密度刻度嵌片,其來自進行參考 曝光之部份未曝光照相記錄材料上一個或多個嵌片區,如 會勒(Wheeler) et a丨之美國專利第5,649,26〇號,寇恩(K〇eng) et al之美國專利第5,563J17號,和寇斯古(c〇sgr〇ve)et以之 美國專利第5,644,647號中所述般。 掃描信號變換之説明系統,包括將影像記錄品質提高至 最向之技術,係由拜爾(Bayer)之美國專利第4,553,156號; 烏拉貝(Urabe) et al之美國專利第4,591,923號;沙沙啓 -65- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(63) (Sasaki) et al之美國專利第4,631,578號;艾寇佛(Alkofer)之 美國專利第4,654,722號;山田(Yamada) et al之美國專利第 4,670,793號;克李斯(Klees)之美國專利第4,694,342號和第 4,962,542號;保威爾(Powell)之美國專利第4,805,031號;梅 ί圼(Mayne) et al之美國專利第4,829,370號;阿杜瓦巴 (Abdulwahab)之美國專利第4,839,721號;馬兹那瓦 (Matsunawa) et al之美國專利第 4,841,361 號和第 4,937,662 號;米茲寇西(Mizukoshi) et al之美國專利第4,891,713號; 佩特利(Petilli)之美國專利第4,912,569號;蘇利凡(Sullivan) et al之美國專利第4,920,501號和第5,070,413號;奇莫多 (Kimoto) et al之美國專利第4,929,979號;希洛沙瓦 (Hirosawa) et al之美國專利第 4,972,256號;卡普蘭(Kaplan) 之美國專利第4,977,521號;沙凱(Sakai)之美國專利第 4,979,027號;恩(Ng)之美國專利第5,003,494號;卡達亞馬 (Katayama)et al之美國專利第 5,008,950號;奇慕拉(Kimura) et al之美國專利第5,065,255號;歐沙姆(Osamu)et al之美國 專利第5,051,842號;李(Lee) et al之美國專利第5,012,333 號;包爾斯(Bowers) et al之美國專利第5,107,346號;泰勒 (Telle)之美國專利第 5,105,266號;麥當勞(MacDonald) et al 之美國專利第5,105,469號;和克翁(Kwon) et al之美國專利 第5,081,692號所揭示般。掃描期間用以彩色平衡調整之技 •述係由莫瑞(Moore) et al之美國專利第5,049,984號和戴維斯 (Davis)之美國專利第5,541,645號揭示。 在大部份例子中,數位彩色記綠一經取得便被調整,以 -66 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) %^ 1 ϋ I :: , ϋ III ϋ I n I%-printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (60) 4-amino-3-α-(methanesulfonium Fluorenylamino) ethyl-N, N-diethylaniline hydride, and 4-amino-N-ethylphosphonoethyl) -m-toluidinedi-p-xylenesulfonic acid. Dye images can be produced by using dye image reducing agents, inert transition metal ion complex oxidants, such as US Patent Nos. 3,748,138, 3,826,652, 3,862,842 and 3,989,526 and Crowvis (Bissonete). Travis), as described in U.S. Patent No. 3,765,891, and / or a method of forming or amplifying a combination of peroxide oxidizing agents, such as Matejec U.S. Patent No. 3,764,490, Research Disclosure, Vol. 116, 1973 In December, No. 11,660, and the Bizonite Study revealed that Book 148, August 1976, as described in Nos. 14836, 14846 and 14847. In particular, a photographic element can be used to form a dye image by a method as described below. U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,822,129 to Dunn et al, U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,834,907 and 3,902,905 to Bisonnet, Bison Knut's U.S. Patent No. 3,847,619, Mowrey's U.S. Patent No. 3,904,413, Hirai et al's U.S. Patent No. 4,880,725, Iwano's U.S. Patent No. 4,954,425 'Mass US Patent No. 4,983,504 to Marsden et al, US Patent No. 5,246,822 to Evans et al, US Patent No. 5,324,624 to Twist, and European Patent No. to Fyson EPO 〇487 616, Tanner Shire (Ding 3111 ^ 11 丨 11) 6 〖&amp; 1 World Patent No. 0090/13059, Masden's World Patent No. WO 90/13061 'Gracie (Grimsey) et al, World Patent No. WO 91/16666, World Law No. wo91 / 17479, • 63- This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) ------ -Order --------- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 588213 A7 V. Description of the invention (61) Masid et al, World Patent No. w〇92 / 〇1972, Tanase World Patent No. WO 92 / 〇5471, World Patent No. WO92 / 〇7299 of Hensson, World Patent No. 093 / 〇1524 and No. 093 of Drizzt / No. 11460, and German Patent No. 4,211,460 of Wingender et al. After development, it can be bleached and fixed, removed silver or silver halide, washed and dried. Once the yellow, magenta, and cyan dye image records are formed in the washed processing element of the present invention, the image information of each color record can be repaired using conventional techniques, and then a record can be produced that can see a color balanced image. For example, it is possible to continuously scan a photographic element in the spectral blue, green and red regions, or to grab blue, green and red light in a single-scanning beam which is distinguished and passed through blue, green and red mirrors to form each color Record the separated scanning beam. A simple technique is to scan the photographic element little by little along a branch parallel scan path. Take induction! !! Note the intensity of the light passing through the component at the scanning point, and the sensor will convert the light shot received into an electronic signal. This electronic badge number is most often changed through steps to form a useful image electronic record green. For example, the electronic signal can be printed by an analog digital converter (anal〇g VII), and printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). (Dot) location information is sent to the digital computer together. In another specific embodiment, the electronic signal is encoded by a colorimeter or color = information to form an electronic record, which is suitable for allowing the image to be reconstructed into a visible form, such as an image displayed on a computer monitor, television Images, printed images, etc. It is expected that many of the developing elements of the present invention will be 64- ^ paper size before the removal of the silver element from the Chinese standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213, invention description (62) (Please read first Note on the back, please fill out this page again) Scanning: The remaining dented silver produces a dense murmur coating, and it is found that the quality of the scanned image can be improved by using the diffused bright light and the ',, and = device. It is possible to use = ^ in this technique to generate diffuse lighting. The preferred system includes a reflection system, which uses a diffusion hole whose inner wall is specially designed to generate highly diffuse reflection, and a transmission system, which diffuses the specular light beam by the optical element in the first beam to diffuse the light. Such components can be glass or plastic, either incorporated into a component that produces the desired diffusion, or surface treated to promote the required diffusion. A challenge encountered when generating images from scanned and selected information is that the number of information pixels that can be used for viewing f can only be used from a fairly basic photographic film. Therefore, it is even more important to scan and develop in order to maximize the quality of the usable image information. Improving image sharpness and minimizing the impact of abnormal pixel signals (ie, noise) is a common study to improve image quality. A traditional technique that minimizes the impact of abnormal pixel signals is to decompose adjacent pixels and read more. The closer the neighboring pixels are, the more weighted they are, and the density readings of each pixel are adjusted to the weighted average. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the element of the present invention can have a density scale insert from one or more insert areas on a part of the unexposed photographic recording material for reference exposure, such as Wheeler et a丨 U.S. Patent No. 5,649,260, Koen et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,563J17, and Cosgrove et. U.S. Patent No. 5,644,647 Like. The description system of the scanning signal conversion, including the technology to improve the image recording quality to the most advanced, is U.S. Patent No. 4,553,156 by Bayer; U.S. Patent No. 4,591,923 by Urabe et al; Qi-65- This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of Invention (63) (Sasaki) et al. Patent No. 4,631,578; U.S. Patent No. 4,654,722 to Alkofer; U.S. Patent No. 4,670,793 to Yamada et al; U.S. Patent Nos. 4,694,342 and 4,962,542 to Klees; U.S. Patent No. 4,805,031 by Powell; U.S. Patent No. 4,829,370 by Mayne et al; U.S. Patent No. 4,839,721 by Abdulwahab; Matsunawa et al U.S. Patent Nos. 4,841,361 and 4,937,662; U.S. Patent No. 4,891,713 to Mizukoshi et al; U.S. Patent No. 4,912,569 to Petilli; Su Lifan U.S. Patent Nos. 4,920,501 and 5,070,413 to Sullivan) et al; U.S. Patent No. 4,929,979 to Kimoto et al; U.S. Patent No. 4,972,256 to Hirosawa et al; Kaplan (Kaplan ), US Patent No. 4,977,521; Sakai, US Patent No. 4,979,027; Ng, US Patent No. 5,003,494; Katayama et al, US Patent No. 5,008,950; Chimura (Kimura) et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,065,255; Osamu et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,051,842; Lee, et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,012,333; Bowers, et al U.S. Patent No. 5,107,346; Telle U.S. Patent No. 5,105,266; MacDonald et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,105,469; and Kwon et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,081 , As revealed by No. 692. Techniques for color balance adjustment during scanning • These are disclosed by Moore et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,049,984 and Davis U.S. Patent No. 5,541,645. In most cases, the digital color green is adjusted as soon as it is obtained. The paper size is -66-this paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (This page)%

1 ϋ ·1 mmM§ 1 emmm 1 ϋ I ϋ i_i ϋ ϋ I %· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 Ιό 五、發明說明(64) ίΐ:看t人二悦之彩色平衡影像’並透過各種輸出變化 時,而保像監示器上或當被列印爲傳統彩色印片 5而保存載騎號之色彩眞實度。掃 化之較佳技術係由喬佳尼(G 國= 結合圖8表示得到觀看二t |〇3〇之信號變化技術 ^ .A . 1IL ^ 硯看(办色平衡影像之尤及較佳技術。 1此藝管理彩色數位影像資訊能力之進一步説明係由 =98喬佳尼和馬登(Madden)數位彩色管理㈣㈣_1 ϋ · 1 mmM§ 1 emmm 1 ϋ I ϋ i_i ϋ ϋ I% · Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Ⅴ. Invention Description (64) ίΐ: Look at the color balance image of the two people's joy and pass through various When the output is changed, the color accuracy of the carrier number is saved on the security monitor or when it is printed as a traditional color print 5. The best technique for sweeping is by Qiao Jiani (G country = combined with Figure 8 to get the signal change technique of viewing two t.30) ^ .A. 1IL ^ (See (especially better technology for color balance image) 1 Further explanation of this art's ability to manage color digital image information is provided by = 98 Giorgini and Madden Digital Color Management㈣㈣_

Management),艾迪生惠斯里(Addison-Wesley)提供。 圖卜乂塊狀圖形式表示其中使用由本發明之彩色 =之影像資訊之方式。藉由傳送全影像曝光和經根據 二:明::相沖洗加工之彩色負片元件i而使用影像掃描器2 [田。V描光束最合宜爲白色光束,通過層單元和通過濾 ,後便刀衣而產生分離之影像記錄一紅色記錄層單元影像 兄錄(R),綠色記綠層單元影像記錄⑹,和藍色記錄層單 ^ Γ t錢(B)。不將光束分裂,藍,綠爛紅色濾、鏡能夠在 ::仏置連續相交。在另一掃描變化中,個別藍,綠和 J色光’如由收集發光二極體而產生般’能夠在各像素位 置被導向。由於元件丨係使用偵測器列一個像素一像素地 掃描,如電荷偶合裝置(CCD)列,或使用線形偵測器列一 直線一 2線地掃描,如線形CCD列,所以產生r,^和3圖 像70件信號序列,其能夠與從掃描器提供之空間位置資料 有相互關係。將信號強度和位置資訊輸送至工作站4,資 訊便轉變爲電子形式R,,G,和B,,其能夠儲存於任何合宜 -67- ‘紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) P%-------訂---------%· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 A7 B7Management), courtesy of Addison-Wesley. The block diagram format shows the way in which the image information using the color = of the present invention is used. The image scanner 2 is used by transmitting a full-image exposure and a color negative element i processed according to the 2 ::: phase process. V-beams are most suitable for white beams, which pass through the layer unit and pass through the filter, and then separate the image to produce a red record layer unit image brother record (R), green record green unit image record ⑹, and blue Record layer list ^ Γ t money (B). Without splitting the beam, the blue, green, and red filters and filters can intersect continuously at the :: setting. In another scanning variation, individual blue, green, and J-colored lights, 'as generated by collecting light-emitting diodes', can be directed at each pixel location. Since the element is scanned one pixel at a time using a detector row, such as a charge coupling device (CCD) row, or a linear one or two row scan is performed using a linear detector row, such as a linear CCD row, r, ^ and 3 image 70-signal sequence, which can be correlated with the spatial position data provided from the scanner. Send the signal strength and position information to the workstation 4, and the information will be converted into electronic forms R, G, and B, which can be stored in any suitable -67- 297 mm) P% ------- Order ---------% · (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 588213 A7 B7

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 儲存裝置5中。 在電影顯影工業中,一種常見嘗試係使用電視電影 裝置將彩色負片資訊變換爲影視信號。二型電視電影轉傲 裝置最常見:⑴使用光電倍增管偵測器之飛點掃描器: 作^感應器之CCD。這些裝置將通過各像素位置彩色負 &lt;掃描光數#變爲t壓。信號處理其後將電子|號顚倒以 便=到正影像。接著將信號放大並調節並輸送至陰極射 &amp;现視器,以將影像或記錄顯示於磁帶上以變儲存。雖然 兼具類比和數位影像信號變換,但較佳以數位形式發出: 號以便變換,因爲絕大部份電腦現在爲數位,此心見: 腦周邊幫助使用,如磁帶,磁碟或光碟。 电 影視監視器6,其接受因應其需求調整之數位影像資 訊i標示爲R”,G”和B”,使能夠觀看由工作站接受之影 像貝4。不仰賴影視監視器之陰極射線管,能夠以液晶顯 讀或其它合宜之電子影像觀看裝置取代。影視監示器典 型上依賴圖像控制裝置3,其能夠包括鍵盤和游標,使工 作站操作者能夠提供影像變換指令,以便調整顯示之影視 影像,和任何從數位影像資訊再生之影像。 能夠觀看任何影像調整,因爲其導入影視顯示器6並儲 存於储存裝置5中。經調整之影像資訊R,,,,G&quot;,和b,m能夠被 送到輸出裝置7,以產生改造之影像。輸出裝置能夠是任 何合苴〈傳統元件寫錄器,如熱染料轉移,噴墨,靜電, 电子照二目’熱染料昇華或其它形式之茚片機。亦包括 或LED印片於經感光相紙。能夠使用輸出裝置控制傳統南 -68 - 本紐尺度適用中關家標準(CNS)A4規格(21q χ撕公楚)_ ·_ -------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(66) 化銀彩色紙張之曝光。輸出 用於觀看之經改造影像。最 #出媒介8,其載有 斷雜訊(粒度),銳度,對::二端:吏用者用於觀看並判 之影像。影視顯示器二:輸出媒介内 =銳度’色調’色彩平衡,和色彩重現, ::網,間電腦網路之全世界網站(w〇dd _上關 係者間傳遞之影像而論。 使用圖1中所示之排列形式,根據本發明之彩色負片元 :中包含《影像係轉變爲數位形式,變換,並改造爲可觀 看形式’繼之喬佳尼eta丨之美时利第5,267,謂號所述之 =驟。能夠將根據本發明之彩色負片記錄材料與美國專利 矛5,257,030號中所述之任何適當方法一起使用。在一個較 佳-阮貫施例中,喬佳尼et al提供一種方法和裝置將來自 傳輸掃描器之R,C^B載影信號轉變爲 測量,其相料如軟片或紙張寫錄器,熱力^機 顯不器等等之參考產生影像裝置之三色信號。測量値相當 於在裝置上適當重現彩色影像需要者。例如,倘若選擇之 參考影像產生裝置爲特定之影視顯示器,選擇之中間影像 數據測量爲參考影視顯#器之R,,G&gt;B,強纟調整信號(編 碼値),則爲了輸入軟片,來自掃描器之R,〇和6載影信號 將被轉換爲相當於在裝置上適當重現彩色影像需要之R,, G’和B’編碼値。產生一數據組,由該數據組便演譯出將 R’ G和B載影信號轉變爲上述編碼値之數學轉換。選擇將 經刻度化之軟片有用曝光範圍充份簡化並覆蓋,藉由曝光 69 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) I— I — I — — — — — — ^---1 — — — — — · (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 A7 __B7 五、發明說明(6?) 一圖騰產生器便產生曝光圖騰,並輸送至曝光裝置。曝光 裝置在軟片上產生三色曝光,產生由近15()色嵌片所組成 之測試影像。測試影像可以使用各種適用於該應用之方法 產生。14些方法包括:使用如感光計之曝光裝置,使用彩 色顯影设備之輸出裝置,記錄由已知光源照明已知反射度 之測试物體影像,或使用照相技藝中已知之方法計算三色 曝光値。倘若使用不同速度之輸入軟片,整個紅色,綠色 和藍色曝光必需視各軟片適當調整,以便補償軟片間之相 對速度差異。因此各軟片接收相等曝光,適於其紅,綠和 藍色速度。將經曝光軟片以化學方式加工沖洗。以傳遞掃 描器讀取軟片化學嵌片,其產生相當於各彩色嵌片之r,g 和B載像信號。編碼値產生器之信號値圖騰產生rgb強度 調整信號,將其輸送至參考影視顯示器。調整各測試彩色 足R’,G’和B’編碼,使得配色裝置,其可以相當於儀器或 j類觀察者,指示影視顯示測試色彩與正片測試色彩或負 茚t之色彩相符。轉換裝置將軟片測試色彩之R,〇和丑載 影信號値轉對應測試色彩之R,,G,和B,編碼値。 將R,G和B載影信號轉換爲中間數據之數學操作可以由 一系列矩陣操作和查明表(LUT)組成。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 --------,_·! (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ”參考圖2 ’在本發明之較佳具體實施例中,輸入載影化 號R,G和脉下被轉換爲中間數據値,纟相當於如下= ==裝置上適當重現彩色影像需要之Rt,G,和B,輸出載 ⑴汉,G和B載影信號,其相當於軟片之測量透射比,利 -70 表紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格⑽X 297公爱) 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(68) 用1-維查明表LUT 1在用以接收並儲存來自軟片掃描器之 電腦内經轉變爲對應密度。 (2) 將來自步驟(1)之密度接著使用衍生自轉換裝置之矩 陣1轉換,產生中間載影信號。 (3) 將步驟(2)之密度視需要以衍生之^維查明表[1;72調 整,使得輸入軟片之淺淡密度轉換爲參考之淺淡密度。 (4) 將步驟(3)之密度透過1-維查明表LUT 3轉換,產生參 考輸出裝置之對應R,,G,和B,輸出載影信號。 推斷各輸入色彩典型上提供個別查明表。在一個具體實 施例中,能夠使用三個1-維查明表LUT,紅,綠和藍色記 錄各一個。在另一具體實施例中,能夠如狄艾瑞克 (D’Errico)之美國專利第4,941,〇39號般使用多維查明表。將 預期以上步驟4中參考輸出裝置之輸出載影信號可以是從 屬裝置編碼値,或者輸出載影信號可能需要進一步調整而 變成裝置特定之編碼値。此類調整可以由額外矩陣轉換或 卜維查明表轉換’或結合此類轉換而完成,以正確地準備 用於使用特定裝置傳遞,儲存,印片或顯示中任一步驟之 輸出載影信號。 在本發明之第二較佳具體實施例中,來自傳遞掃描器之 R’ G和B載影信號經#變爲影像轉唤和/或儲存測量,其相 當於單一參考影像記綠裝置和/或媒介之測量或敘述,其 中所有輸入媒介之測量值相當於三色値,其頃經參考裝置 或媒介形成,其在相同還境下捕捉原始景物,於該環境下 輸入媒介捕捉1¾景物。例如,倘若選擇之參考影像記錄媒 ___-71 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4 -—---- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Printed in storage device 5 by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. In the film development industry, a common attempt is to use television film devices to convert color negative film information into film and television signals. The most common type of TV movie and movie turning device: 飞 Flying spot scanner using photomultiplier tube detector: CCD for ^ sensor. These devices change the color negative &lt; scanning light number &quot; through each pixel position to t pressure. After signal processing, the electronic | sign is inverted so that the image is positive. The signal is then amplified and adjusted and sent to a cathode ray & viewfinder to display the image or recording on a tape for storage. Although it has both analog and digital image signal conversion, it is better to send the number in digital form: for conversion, since most computers are now digital, this is my opinion: brain peripherals such as magnetic tape, magnetic disk or optical disk. The film video monitor 6, which accepts digital image information i adjusted according to its needs, is labeled R ", G", and B ", enabling viewing of the image received by the workstation 4. It does not rely on the cathode-ray tube of the film monitor, and can Replaced by liquid crystal display or other suitable electronic image viewing devices. The video monitor typically relies on the image control device 3, which can include a keyboard and cursor, so that the workstation operator can provide image conversion instructions in order to adjust the displayed video image , And any image reproduced from digital image information. Any image adjustment can be viewed because it is imported into the video display 6 and stored in the storage device 5. The adjusted image information R ,,, G &quot;, and b, m can be adjusted. Sent to output device 7 to produce a modified image. The output device can be any combination of traditional component writers, such as thermal dye transfer, inkjet, electrostatic, electronic photo binocular 'thermal dye sublimation or other forms of indene film Machine. It also includes or prints on light-sensitive photo paper. It can use the output device to control the traditional South-68-This standard is applicable to the Zhongguanjia Standard (CNS) A4 Grid (21q χ tear public Chu) _ · _ ------- Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) A7 Employee Consumer Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printing V. Description of the invention (66) Exposure of silver colored paper. Output of the modified image for viewing. The most #out medium 8, which contains broken noise (grain size), sharpness, right :: two ends: Officials use it for viewing and judging images. Film and television display 2: output medium = sharpness 'hue' color balance, and color reproduction, :: network, inter-computer network of the world's website (wodd_on Consider the image transmitted between related parties. Using the arrangement shown in Figure 1, the color negative element according to the present invention: "The image system is transformed into a digital form, transformed, and transformed into a viewable form." Niseta's Lamex No. 5,267, as described in the predicate = step. The color negative recording material according to the present invention can be used with any suitable method described in U.S. Patent No. 5,257,030. In a preferred-Ruan In the embodiment, Giorgi et al provides a method and apparatus for transferring R, C from a transmission scanner. ^ B video signal is converted to measurement, and its reference material such as film or paper recorder, thermal display, etc. generates a three-color signal of the imaging device. Measurement 値 is equivalent to appropriately reproducing a color image on the device Those who need it. For example, if the selected reference image generation device is a specific film and television display, the selected intermediate image data is measured as R, G &gt; B of the reference film and video display device, and the adjustment signal (encoding) is used for input. For film, the R, 0, and 6 load signals from the scanner will be converted to R, G ', and B' codes equivalent to those required for proper reproduction of color images on the device. A data set is generated from which The mathematical transformation that converts the R 'G and B video signals into the above-mentioned encoding is then deduced. Choose to fully simplify and cover the useful exposure range of the scaled film. Exposure 69 paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × X 297 mm) I — I — I — — — — — — ^ --- 1 — — — — — · (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 588213 A7 __B7 V. Description of the invention (6?) An totem generator will generate an exposure totem and send it to the exposure device . The exposure device produces a three-color exposure on the film, producing a test image consisting of nearly 15 () color inserts. Test images can be produced using a variety of methods suitable for the application. 14 methods include: using an exposure device such as a photometer, using an output device of a color developing device, recording an image of a test object illuminated by a known light source with a known reflectance, or calculating a three-color exposure using a method known in photography value. If input films of different speeds are used, the entire red, green, and blue exposure must be adjusted appropriately for each film in order to compensate for the relative speed difference between the films. Therefore each film receives equal exposure, suitable for its red, green and blue speeds. The exposed film was chemically processed and processed. The film chemical inserts are read with a transfer scanner, which produces the r, g, and B image-bearing signals equivalent to the color inserts. The signal of the encoder and generator, the totem generates the rgb intensity adjustment signal, and sends it to the reference video display. Adjust the R ′, G ’, and B’ codes of each test color to make the color matching device, which can be equivalent to an instrument or a type j observer, instruct the film display test color to match the positive test color or negative ind t color. The conversion device converts the R, 0 and video signals of the test colors of the film into R, G, and B, corresponding to the test colors, and encodes them. The mathematical operations for converting the R, G, and B carrier signals into intermediate data can consist of a series of matrix operations and look-up tables (LUTs). Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs --------, _ ·! (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) "Refer to Figure 2 'In the preferred embodiment of the present invention The input image number R, G and the pulse are converted into intermediate data 値, 纟 is equivalent to the following = == Rt, G, and B required for proper reproduction of color images on the device, and the output loader G, B, and G are output. Carrier signal, which is equivalent to the measured transmittance of a film. The paper size of the -70 sheet is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size X X 297 public love. 588213 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (68) The 1-dimensional look-up table LUT 1 is transformed into the corresponding density in the computer used to receive and store the film from the scanner. (2) The density from step (1) is then used by a matrix derived from the conversion device 1 conversion to generate the intermediate shadow signal. (3) Adjust the density of step (2) as needed by the derived dimensional identification table [1; 72, so that the light density of the input film is converted to the reference light density. (4) Convert the density of step (3) through the 1-dimensional look-up table LUT 3 to produce Reference the corresponding R, G, and B output devices to output the shadow-carrying signal. It is inferred that each input color typically provides an individual lookup table. In a specific embodiment, three 1-dimensional lookup tables LUT, red can be used. , Green and blue records each. In another embodiment, a multidimensional look-up table can be used like US Patent No. 4,941,039 by D'Errico. It will be expected in step 4 above The output video signal of the reference output device may be the code of the slave device, or the output video signal may need to be further adjusted to become a device-specific code. Such adjustments can be performed by additional matrix conversion or BV table conversion 'or a combination This type of conversion is done to correctly prepare the output video signal for any of the steps of transferring, storing, printing or displaying using a specific device. In a second preferred embodiment of the present invention, it is from a transfer scanner The R ′ G and B load image signals are transformed into image recall and / or storage measurement by #, which is equivalent to the measurement or description of a single reference image recording device and / or medium, in which all input media The measured value is equivalent to the three-colored tadpole, which is formed by a reference device or medium, which captures the original scene under the same environment, and enters the medium to capture 1¾ of the scene under this environment. For example, if the selected reference image recording medium ___- 71 -This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4------ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

-I 1 ϋ I ϋ ϋ i ϋ^*δ,, 8 ϋ n I ϋ i-i ϋ I ρ 588213 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 '^^------B7_____五、發明說明(69) 介爲一種特定彩色負片,且選擇之中間影像數據爲該參考 軟片之測量RGB密度,則對於根據本發明之輸入彩色負片 而言,來自掃描器之R,G*B載影信號將被轉換爲ri,&amp; 和B,密度値,其相當於由參考彩色負面形成之影像者,其 頃在根據本發明之彩色負面材料曝光之相同環境下曝光。 、曝光—圖騰,選擇將經校正之軟片有用B暴光範圍充份簡化 並覆蓋,係藉由將圖騰產生器曝光而產生並輸送至曝光裝 置。曝光裝置在軟片上產生三色曝光,以產生由近15〇個 色彩欣片組成之影像。測試影像可以使用各種適於應用之 万法產生。這些方法包括··使用如感光計之曝光裝置,使 用如彩色顯影裝之輸出裝置,記綠由已知光源已知反射照 光 &lt; 測試物體影像,或使用照相技藝中已知之方法計算三 色曝光。倘若使用不同速度之輸入軟片,則整個紅,綠和 藍色曝光必需視各軟片正確調整,以補償軟片間之相對速 度差異。各軟片因而接收相等曝光,適於其紅,綠和藍色 速度。將經曝光軟片以化學方式加工沖洗。以傳遞择描器 謂取軟片化學嵌片,其產生相當於各彩色嵌片之尺,〇和b 載像信號,並藉由傳遞密度計,其產生對應各&amp;片之ri, G·和B,密度値。轉換裝置將軟片測試色彩之卜載影 信號値轉換爲對應參考彩色負片測試色彩之R,,G,和B,密 度。在另一·變化中,倘若選擇之參考影像記綠媒介爲特定 彩色負片,選擇之中間影像爲參考軟片步驟2之預定R,,g, 和B中間治、度,則關於根據本發明之輸入彩色負片而言, 來自掃描器之R,G和B載影信號將被轉換爲相當於在裝置 -72- 本紙張尺度@ @家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公楚) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) m. 訂: .¾ 五、發明說明(7〇) 其頃 成之 同環 上適當重現彩色影像需要之 ^ ^ ^ „ 而罟您R,G和B,中間密度値, •、工由參考杉色負片形成,並舍 與德I # ^ ^ 其相s於由參考彩色負面形 境下曝光。 尽發月之^負面材料曝光之相 因此根據本方法校正之各 各輸入專人片攻今將儘可能產生同 一中間數據値,其相當於為東去於山姑田 Μ 旦,你兩、 祁田於在參考輸出裝置上適當重現彩色 二Γ要’ G*B’編碼値,其未*參考輸出裝置之考 :色負片軟片形成。未校正軟片亦可以與類似形式軟片之 轉換裝置一起使用,結果將與所述者類似。 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 將R G和B載厅Ά號轉換爲此較佳具體實施例之中間數 據之數學操作,可以由-系列矩陣操作和卜維廣組成。 三個輸入色彩典型上提供三個表。預期此類轉換亦能夠在 其它具體實施财,使料—數學操作或數學操作組合, 、由主%細產生之计算步驟完成,其包括但不限於矩陣代 數,取決於一個或多個載影信號之代數表示,和卜維 LUT。在一個具體實施例中,步驟2之矩陣爲3χ3矩陣。在 更佳具體實施例中,步驟2之矩陣1爲3 χ丨〇矩陣。在一 較佳具體實施例中,步驟4中之1-維LUT 3將中間載影信號 根據彩色負片特徵曲線轉換,因而重現正常彩色印片影像 色凋尺。在另一較佳具體實施例中,步驟4中之卜維LUT 3 將中間載影信號根據更令人喜歡之彩色負片特徵曲線轉 換’如擁有較低影像對比。 由於這些轉換之複雜性,應該注意從R,G和b成爲R,, G’和B,之轉換可以經常由3_維lUT更佳地完成。此類3_維 -73- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 五、發明說明(71 ) LUT可以根據j·狄瑞克之美國專利第4,941,〇39號中之敎導 發展。 ’ 預期s影像爲電子形式時,影像加工沖洗並不限於上述 之特疋’文換。當影像爲此形式時,可以使用額外影像變 換,包括但不限於標準景物平衡演算(以根據二個或多個 負片内區域之密度,決定密度和色彩平衡之關係),色調 比例變換,以放大軟片未曝光反差係數,經由迴旋或非銳 利彩色修色非適合或適合之銳化,降低紅眼,和非適合或 適合之抑制粒子。此外,影像可以以人工方式變換,拉近 拉遠,切割,並與更多影像結合或該技藝中已知之其它變 ^ 仁〜像經更正,且發生任何額外影像處理和變換, 〜像可以經電子傳遞至遠距位置或經局部寫錄於各種輸出 裝置,^括但不限於_化銀或紙張寫綠器,熱茚片機,電 子…、相印片機,噴墨茚片機,顯示監視器,CD碟,光學和 磁性電子信號儲存裝置,和掰技藝中已知其它形式之儲存 和顯示裝置。 在本發明〈另-具體實施例中,能夠使用阿拉卡瓦 (Arakawa) et ai之美國專利第5,962,2〇5號中所述之照明,色 度感光和影像萃取物件與方法。 製備實例 貫彳1 &quot;先明有用於本發明之代表性經卩且斷化合物之合 成。 巧張峨用 -74- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} ί ti I ·ϋ ϋ I— I ,· ϋ i^i ϋ ϋ ϋ I ϋ 言 297 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(72) \Δ ♦ CHjSOjNa-I 1 ϋ I ϋ ϋ i ϋ ^ * δ ,, 8 ϋ n I ϋ ii ϋ I ρ 588213 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 '^^ ------ B7_____ (69) Referred to as a specific color negative film, and the selected intermediate image data is the measured RGB density of the reference film, for the input color negative film according to the present invention, the R, G * B load-bearing signal from the scanner will be Converted to ri, &amp; and B, density 値, which corresponds to the image formed by the reference color negative, which is exposed in the same environment as the color negative material according to the present invention. Exposure-Totem, choose to fully simplify and cover the useful B exposure range of the corrected film, which is generated by exposing the totem generator and transported to the exposure device. The exposure device produces a three-color exposure on the film to produce an image composed of nearly 150 color films. Test images can be generated using a variety of methods suitable for the application. These methods include: · using an exposure device such as a photometer, using an output device such as a color developing device, recording green reflected light from a known light source &lt; test object image, or calculating a three-color exposure using a method known in photography . If input films with different speeds are used, the entire red, green, and blue exposures must be adjusted properly for each film to compensate for the relative speed differences between the films. Each film thus receives equal exposure, suitable for its red, green and blue speeds. The exposed film was chemically processed and processed. The transfer film picker is called a soft chemical patch, which generates a ruler corresponding to each color patch, 0 and b image-bearing signals, and a transfer density meter, which generates ri, G, and B, density 値. The conversion device converts the signal 载 of the test color of the film into R, G, and B, and the density corresponding to the test color of the reference color negative film. In another variation, if the selected reference image is a specific color negative green medium, and the selected intermediate image is the predetermined R, g, and B intermediate rule and degree of step 2 of the reference film, then the input according to the present invention For color negative film, the R, G, and B load signals from the scanner will be converted to the equivalent of the device -72- this paper size @ @ 家 standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 Gongchu) (please first Read the notes on the reverse side and fill out this page) m. Order: .¾ 5. Description of the invention (70) It is necessary to properly reproduce the color image on the same ring ^ ^ ^ ^ 罟 R, G and B , The middle density 値, • The work is formed by the reference cedar negative, and the phase is exposed under the negative color of the reference color. The phase of the exposure of the negative material is made according to this method. The correction of each input person film will now produce the same intermediate data as much as possible, which is equivalent to going to Shangu Tian M. You, Qi Tian Yu appropriately reproduce color 2 on the reference output device. G * B 'encoding 値, which is not * reference output device consideration: color negative film soft Formed. Uncorrected film can also be used with a similar type of film conversion device, and the result will be similar to that described. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the conversion of RG and B carrier halls to this is a better specific implementation For example, the mathematical operation of intermediate data can be composed of-series matrix operation and Pu Weiguang. Three input colors typically provide three tables. It is expected that this type of conversion can also be implemented in other specific implementations, making it possible to combine mathematical operations or mathematical operations. The calculation steps generated by the master are complete, including, but not limited to, matrix algebra, which depends on the algebraic representation of one or more shadow-carrying signals, and the Bouvier LUT. In a specific embodiment, the matrix of step 2 is 3χ3 matrix. In a more specific embodiment, matrix 1 in step 2 is a 3 χ 丨 〇 matrix. In a preferred embodiment, the 1-dimensional LUT 3 in step 4 divides the intermediate carrier signal according to the characteristics of the color negative film. The curve is converted, thus reproducing the color fade of the normal color print image. In another preferred embodiment, the Budweiser LUT 3 in step 4 carries the video message in the middle. According to the more preferred color negative characteristic curve conversion, such as having lower image contrast. Due to the complexity of these conversions, it should be noted that from R, G and b to R ,, G 'and B, the conversion can often be changed from 3_ The dimension lUT is better completed. This type of 3_dimensional-73- This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7 V. Description of the invention (71) The LUT can be based on j. The leading development in US Patent No. 4,941,039 by Gram. 'It is expected that when the image is in electronic form, image processing and processing is not limited to the above-mentioned special features. When the image is in this form, additional image transformation can be used , Including but not limited to standard scene balance calculations (to determine the relationship between density and color balance based on the density of the areas within two or more negatives), tonal ratio conversion, to magnify the unexposed contrast coefficient of the film, and through convolution or non-sharp color Sharpening is not suitable or suitable for sharpening, red-eye reduction, and particle suppression is not suitable or suitable. In addition, the image can be manually transformed, zoomed in, cut out, combined with more images or other changes known in the art ^ Ren ~ The image is corrected, and any additional image processing and transformation occurs, ~ The image can be Electronically transmitted to remote locations or recorded locally on various output devices, including but not limited to _Silver or paper writing green device, thermal indica film machine, electronic ..., photo printer, inkjet indica film machine, display Monitors, CDs, optical and magnetic electronic signal storage devices, and other forms of storage and display devices known in the art. In another embodiment of the present invention, the illumination, chroma-sensitive, and image extraction objects and methods described in Arakawa et ai U.S. Patent No. 5,962,205 can be used. Preparation Example The synthesis of a representative trivalent compound used in the present invention has been previously described. Qiao Zhang E Yong -74- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page} ί ti I 72) \ Δ ♦ CHjSOjNa

33

D-16 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 舲氧化丙^ (L,7·2毫升,1〇5毫莫耳),甲烷亞磺酸鈉 (9.19克。’ 90毫莫耳)’ _價蹲酸納單水合物〇6 56克)於⑽ 毫升90 C之水中加熱丨8小時。將溶液冷卻並以1⑼毫升 乙酞乙酯萃取。將萃取液於硫酸鈉上乾燥並濃縮爲固體。1之產f爲6.42克(46毫莫耳,52%)。 將2(3.32克,24毫莫耳),化合物叉(4·〇8克,20毫莫耳), 和二乙酸三丁基錫(〇.〇5毫升)於6〇毫升丨,孓二氯乙烷之溶液 在室溫攪拌7天。將粗製反應混合物以矽膠上層析術純化。 〇-16之產量爲6.15克(18亳莫耳,90%),111.?.80-82&lt;&gt;(:, ESMS: ES+m/z 343 (M+1,1〇〇%) 〇 製備D-17 -75- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公楚) I ϋ ϋ ϋ a·— 1 i·— 一 &amp;,0 I ϋ 1 11 n · 588213 A7 ----—-— R7 五、發明說明(73 )D-16 (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed tritium oxide ^ (L, 7.2 ml, 105 mmol), Methane sulfinic acid Sodium (9.19 g. '90 millimoles) 'valence acid sodium monohydrate (56 g) was heated in ⑽ml of 90 C water for 8 hours. The solution was cooled and extracted with 1 mL of ethyl phthalate. The extract was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to a solid. The yield of 1 is 6.42 grams (46 millimoles, 52%). Mix 2 (3.32 g, 24 mmol), a compound fork (4.08 g, 20 mmol), and tributyltin diacetate (0.05 ml) in 60 ml of dichloroethane. The solution was stirred at room temperature for 7 days. The crude reaction mixture was purified by chromatography on silica gel. The yield of 〇-16 is 6.15 g (18 mol, 90%), 111.?.80-82&lt;&gt; (:, ESMS: ES + m / z 343 (M + 1, 100%) 〇 Preparation D-17 -75- This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 cm) I ϋ ϋ ϋ a · — 1 i · — 一 &amp;, 0 I ϋ 1 11 n · 588213 A7 ----—-— R7 V. Description of the invention (73)

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印5衣 將硼氫化鈉(3.95克,104亳莫耳)在室溫以45分鐘部份添 加於化合物生(9.11克,50毫莫耳)於甲醇(15〇毫升)之懸浮 液。添加水(50笔升)蒸除甲醇。將殘逢以醚萃取,將萃 取物於硫酸鈉上乾燥並濃縮爲油。么之產量爲8.85克(48毫 莫耳,96%)。 將5 (4.05克,22毫莫耳),i (4.08克,20毫莫耳),和〇.〇5 毫升二乙酸三丁基錫於二路甲烷(20毫升)之溶液在室溫攪 拌20小時。將反應混合物以醚(1 〇〇毫升)稀釋,並以水逐漸 處理,得到粗製產物,將其以矽膠上層析術純化。D-17之產量爲 5.49 克(14 毫莫耳,71% ),m.p. 149-151 °C,ESMS: ES+m/z 389 (M+1,100%),ES-m/z 387(M-1,350/〇) 〇 照相實例 ·_ ^^-------tr--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -76- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公爱) 588213Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed 5 coats Sodium borohydride (3.95 g, 104 mol) was added to the compound (9.11 g, 50 mmol) in methanol (15. Ml) of the suspension. Water (50 liters) was added to evaporate the methanol. The extract was extracted with ether, and the extract was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to an oil. The yield was 8.85 grams (48 millimoles, 96%). A solution of 5 (4.05 g, 22 mmol), i (4.08 g, 20 mmol), and 0.05 mL of tributyltin diacetate in methane (20 mL) was stirred at room temperature for 20 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with ether (100 ml) and gradually treated with water to give the crude product, which was purified by silica gel chromatography. The yield of D-17 is 5.49 grams (14 millimoles, 71%), mp 149-151 ° C, ESMS: ES + m / z 389 (M + 1, 100%), ES-m / z 387 (M -1,350 / 〇) 〇Photographs · _ ^^ ------- tr --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -76- This paper size Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 public love) 588213

發明說明(74 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 、、主口工沖洗環境如實例中所述。除非特別指出,顯影後浸 /貝於柯達夕彩色定影液(K〇dak Flexk_r Fix⑽如㈣中而 將齒化^移除。通常,刪除此步驟將得到測量密度提高約 〇·2杰貫例中使用以下組份。亦包括全部化學結構表。 銀鹽分散液SS-1 : 將攪拌反應容器裝填431克石灰處理之明膠和6569克蒸餾 水。製備包含214克苯並三唑,2150克蒸餾水,和79〇克2·5 莫耳濃度氫氧化鈉之溶液(溶液Β)。視需要添加溶液3,硝DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION (74) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, and the main worker's washing environment is as described in the example. Unless otherwise specified, dipping / being in Kodak Color Fixer (K〇dak Flexk_r Fix⑽ 如 ⑽) Tooth removal is removed. In general, deleting this step will increase the measured density by about 0.2. The following components are used in the example. The entire chemical structure table is also included. Silver Salt Dispersion SS-1: Will stir the reaction The container was filled with 431 grams of lime-treated gelatin and 6569 grams of distilled water. A solution (solution B) containing 214 grams of benzotriazole, 2150 grams of distilled water, and 79 grams of 2.5 Molar sodium hydroxide solution was prepared. The solution was added as needed 3, nitrate

酸和氫氧化鈉而將反應容器内混合物調整至pAg 7 25,pH 8.00 〇 將4公升〇·54莫耳濃度硝酸銀以25〇cc/分鐘添加於壺中, 同時添加溶液B而將pAg維持於7.25。持續此處理直到硝酸 銀溶液耗盡,於該點以超過濾濃縮混合物。產生之銀鹽分 散液包含苯並三Π坐鹽之細密顆粒。 銀鹽分散液SS-2 : 將攪拌反應容器裝填43 1克石灰處理之明膠和6569克蒸館 水製備包含320克1-豕基-5-¾四哇,2044克蒸餘水,和 790克2.5莫耳濃度氫氧化鈉之溶液(溶液b)。視需要添加溶 液B,硝酸和氫氧化鈉而將反應容器内混合物調整至pAg 7.25,pH 8.00 〇 將4公升〇·54莫耳濃度硝酸銀以250cc/分鐘添加於壺中, 同時添加溶液B而將pAg維持於7.25。持續此處理直到硝酸 銀溶液耗盡,於該點以超過濾濃縮混合物。產生之銀鹽分 散液包含1-苯基-5-號四吐之細p密顆粒。 -77- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) # 訂---------丨· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 A7 _______B7__ 五、發明說明(75 ) 鹵化銀乳液: 這些實例中使用之乳液全部爲碘溴化銀片狀顯粒,其藉 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 由該技藝中已知之傳統方法沉澱。下表〗 ^ 、精 I1 ’ 矛筆 , 使用其碘化物含量(剩餘者假設爲溴化物),其維度,和感 光染料以得到感光度。將這些乳液全部如該技藝^知: 以化學方式感光,產生最佳感光度。 、又 表1 乳液 感光度 碘化物 含量(%) 直徑 (微米) 厚度 s (微米) 染料 EY-1 黃 1.3 0.54 0.084 SY-1 EY-2 黃 4.1 1.25 0.137 SY-1 EY-3 黃 2 1.23 0.125 SY-1 EY-4 黃 2 0.45 0.061 SY-1 EY-5 黃 2 0.653 0.093 SY-1 EM -1 紫紅 1.3 0.55 0.084 SM-1+SM-2 EM-2 紫紅 4.1 1.22 0.111 SM-1 + SM-3 EM-3 紫紅 2 1.23 0.125 SM-1 + SM-3 EM-4 紫紅 2 0.45 0.061 SM-1 + SM-3 EM-5 紫紅 2 0.653 0.093 SM-1 + SM-3 EC-1 青 1.3 0.55 0.084 SC-1 EC-2 青 4.1 1.2 0.11 SC-1 EC-3 青 2 1.23 0.125 SC-1 + SC-2 EC-4 青 2 0.45 0.061 SC-1+SC-2 EC-5 青 2 0.653 0.093 SC-1 + SC-2 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -78-— 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(76 ) 偶合劑分散液CDM-1 : 以包含偶合劑M-1和磷酸三甲苯酯以重量比1: 0.5之傳統 方法製備油基偶合劑分散液。 偶合劑分散液CDM-2 ·· 以包含偶合劑M-2無任何額外固定溶液之傳統方法製備 偶合劑分散液。 偶合劑分散液CDC-1 ·· 以包含偶合劑C-2和磷酸二丁酯以重量比1: 2之傳統方法 製備油基偶合劑分散液。 偶合劑分散液CDC-2 : 以包含偶合劑C-2和磷酸-二丁酯以重量比1: 1之傳統方法 製備油基偶合劑分散液。 偶合劑分散液CDY-1 : 以包含偶合劑Y-1和磷酸二丁酯以重量比1: 0.5之傳統方 法製備油基偶合劑分散液。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -------訂--------- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 DC-1 H、',人 0Acid and sodium hydroxide to adjust the mixture in the reaction vessel to pAg 7 25, pH 8.00 〇 4 liters of 0.54 Molar silver nitrate was added to the pot at 25 cc / min, while solution B was added to maintain pAg at 7.25. This process was continued until the silver nitrate solution was consumed, at which point the mixture was concentrated by ultrafiltration. The resulting silver salt dispersion contains fine particles of benzotrillium salt. Silver salt dispersion SS-2: Fill a stirred reaction container with 43 grams of lime-treated gelatin and 6569 grams of steamed water to prepare 320 grams of 1-fluorenyl-5-¾ tetra wah, 2044 grams of distilled water, and 790 grams 2.5 mol sodium hydroxide solution (solution b). Add solution B, nitric acid and sodium hydroxide as needed to adjust the mixture in the reaction vessel to pAg 7.25, pH 8.00. Add 4 liters of 0.54 Molar silver nitrate to the pot at 250cc / min. pAg was maintained at 7.25. This process was continued until the silver nitrate solution was consumed, at which point the mixture was concentrated by ultrafiltration. The resulting silver salt dispersion contained fine 1-phenyl-5-tetratyl fine p-dense particles. -77- This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) # Order --------- 丨 · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 588213 A7 _______B7__ 5. Description of the invention (75) Silver halide emulsion: The emulsions used in these examples are all silver iodide bromide flakes, which can be borrowed (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). Known by this technology Precipitation by traditional methods. The table below ^, refined I1 'spear pen, uses its iodide content (the remainder is assumed to be bromide), its dimensions, and photosensitizing dye to obtain the sensitivity. These emulsions are all known in the art: chemically sensitive to produce the best sensitivity. Table 1 Emulsion sensitivity Iodide content (%) Diameter (micron) Thickness s (micron) Dye EY-1 yellow 1.3 0.54 0.084 SY-1 EY-2 yellow 4.1 1.25 0.137 SY-1 EY-3 yellow 2 1.23 0.125 SY-1 EY-4 Yellow 2 0.45 0.061 SY-1 EY-5 Yellow 2 0.653 0.093 SY-1 EM -1 Fuchsia 1.3 0.55 0.084 SM-1 + SM-2 EM-2 Fuchsia 4.1 1.22 0.111 SM-1 + SM- 3 EM-3 Fuchsia 2 1.23 0.125 SM-1 + SM-3 EM-4 Fuchsia 2 0.45 0.061 SM-1 + SM-3 EM-5 Fuchsia 2 0.653 0.093 SM-1 + SM-3 EC-1 Green 1.3 0.55 0.084 SC-1 EC-2 Green 4.1 1.2 0.11 SC-1 EC-3 Green 2 1.23 0.125 SC-1 + SC-2 EC-4 Green 2 0.45 0.061 SC-1 + SC-2 EC-5 Green 2 0.653 0.093 SC- 1 + SC-2 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs-78-— This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (76) Coupling agent Dispersion CDM-1: An oil-based coupling agent dispersion was prepared by a conventional method including the coupling agent M-1 and tricresyl phosphate in a weight ratio of 1: 0.5. Coupling Agent Dispersion CDM-2 ... A coupling agent dispersion was prepared by the conventional method including the coupling agent M-2 without any additional fixing solution. Coupling Agent Dispersion Liquid CDC-1 An oil-based coupling agent dispersion was prepared by a conventional method including the coupling agent C-2 and dibutyl phosphate at a weight ratio of 1: 2. Coupling agent dispersion CDC-2: An oil-based coupling agent dispersion was prepared by a conventional method including the coupling agent C-2 and phosphoric acid-dibutyl ester in a weight ratio of 1: 1. Coupling agent dispersion CDY-1: An oil-based coupling agent dispersion was prepared by a conventional method including the coupling agent Y-1 and dibutyl phosphate in a weight ratio of 1: 0.5. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) ------- Order --------- Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy DC-1 H, ', person 0

StructureStructure

N、 ^NHS02CH3 79- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公釐) 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(77)N, ^ NHS02CH3 79- This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 χ 297 mm) 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (77)

0、 Ο W// .S DC-2 NT 、〇〆0, Ο W // .S DC-2 NT, 〇〆

Η. iΗ. I

.CN DC-3 Ν 、〇〆.CN DC-3 Ν, 〇〆

(請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) φ DC-4(Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) φ DC-4

ϋ I ϋ I mM§ ϋ 一 δ,· I ϋ ^1 ϋ ·1 ϋ ·_ϋ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 DC-5ϋ I ϋ I mM§ ϋ One δ, · I ϋ ^ 1 ϋ · 1 ϋ · _ϋ Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs DC-5

ΝΒ, 80- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) Ο JJ ΗΝ^^ΟΝΒ, 80- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 〇 JJ ΗΝ ^^ Ο

NO, 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(78) DC-6 DC-7 DC-8 0 人NO, 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (78) DC-6 DC-7 DC-8 0 people

HNHN

N〇2 NEt,No. 2 NEt,

Ο u ΗΝ^^Ο〆Ο u ΗΝ ^^ Ο〆

(請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 M-1(Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs M-1

OH -81 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公釐) 588213 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製OH -81 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) 588213 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 鲁 ^ι_· 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(8〇) C-3This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

尸-c8h17 NCorpse-c8h17 N

C〇2H Y-1C〇2H Y-1

(請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) φ SY-1 SY-2 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 SM-1(Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) φ SY-1 SY-2 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs SM-1

Produce

Cl -83- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 B7 五、發明說明(81) SM-2Cl-83- This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (81) SM-2

SM-3SM-3

SC-1SC-1

〇 〇=έ·' Θό SC-2 〇 OH _//〇 〇 = έ · 'Θό SC-2 〇 OH _ //

ΝΗ 硬化劑-1 --------#§.----- —訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 硬化劑-2 抗朦霧劑 AF-1 φΝΗ Hardener-1 -------- # § .----- —Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Employee Consumer Cooperative Printed Hardener-2 Anti-Misting Agent AF-1 φ

NaNa

00

-84 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 B7_ ' ' ------------- 五、發明說明(82) : 所有實例1之塗層皆包含單一感光層’並係根據表“中 所列之格式,以改變所參混顯影劑之變化製備。於厚度7 密耳之聚(對苯二酸乙二醇)支撑體上製備所有塗層。 &amp; 將顯影劑於水性漿液中使用以下化學式之氧化錯珠粒球 磨3天。每克參混合之顯影劑添加0· 2克三異丙基茶續酸 鈉,10克水,和25毫升珠粒。研磨後,過濾移除氧化錯珠 粒。使用前將漿液冷藏。 表1-1 :基本格式 組份 沉積 銀(來自乳液E_l) 〇·54克/平方公尺 銀(來自銀鹽SS-1) 〇·54克/平方公尺 偶合劑M-1 (來自偶合劑分散液CDM-1) 0.54克/平方公尺 基礎釋放劑(三氣乙酸胍) 〇·81克/平方公尺 水楊酿苯胺 0.86克/平方公尺 1-苯基-5-錄四吐 0.32克/平方公尺 經石灰處理之明膠 4.31克/平方公尺 顯影劑 2.2毫莫耳/平方公尺 將產生之塗層經由階梯形械子曝光於藉由日光5 A和雷騰 (Wratten) 2B濾鏡3000K濾光之3.04 log勒克司光源。曝光時 間爲1秒。曝光後,將塗層接觸加熱壓板2〇秒而熱處理。 以各種壓板溫度處理許多條,以便產生最佳之條處理環 境。由此數據得到二個係數: A.開始溫度,TQ : -85- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)-84 This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7 B7_ '' ------------- V. Description of Invention (82): All Examples 1 The coatings all contain a single photosensitive layer 'and are prepared according to the format listed in the table "with changes in the developer mixed. On a poly (ethylene terephthalate) support with a thickness of 7 mils All coatings were prepared. &Amp; The developer was ball milled in an aqueous slurry using the oxidized beads of the following chemical formula for 3 days. 0.2 g of sodium triisopropyl teatinate and 10 g of water were added per gram of developer mixed. , And 25 ml beads. After grinding, filter to remove oxidized beads. Refrigerate the slurry before use. Table 1-1: Basic format components deposit silver (from emulsion E_1) 0.54 g / m² silver ( From silver salt SS-1) 0.54 g / m 2 coupling agent M-1 (from coupling agent dispersion CDM-1) 0.54 g / m 2 Basic release agent (guanidine triacetate) 0.81 g / Salicylic acid aniline 0.86 g / m 2 1-phenyl-5-chloro tetravot 0.32 g / m 2 Lime-treated gelatin 4.31 g / m 2 The developer of 2.2 meters per square meter will expose the resulting coating through a stepped machine to a 3.04 log lux light source with 3000K filtering by daylight 5 A and Wratten 2B filters. Exposure time It is 1 second. After exposure, the coating is contacted with a heated platen for 20 seconds and heat-treated. Many strips are processed at various platen temperatures to produce the best strip processing environment. From this data, two coefficients are obtained: A. Starting temperature, TQ : -85- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 public love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

I I--訂·- ----I I I 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 588213 A7I I--Order ·----- I I I Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 588213 A7

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 對應所需之溫度產生最大密度(〇111以)爲〇·5。較低溫度表 示更具活性之顯影劑,其爲希望得到的。 又 Β·尖峰差別,Dp : 關於最佳壓板溫度,尖峰差別相當於該値:Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The maximum density (0.011) corresponding to the required temperature is 0.5. Lower temperatures indicate a more active developer, which is desirable. Β · Spike difference, Dp: Regarding the optimal platen temperature, the spike difference is equivalent to this:

Dmax - DminDmax-Dmin

Dp==—-———Dp == —-———

DminDmin

Dp値越高,表示顯影劑產生雜訊信號提高,其爲希望得 到的。 表1-2表示實例1中使用之途料結果。所列之項目爲顯影 劑,開始溫度T。,和相對差別,Dp。對照實例顯影劑係該 技藝中已知之材料。 表1-2 塗層 顯影劑 T〇 (°C) Dp CM-1 (對照) DC-1 191 0.23 C-1-2 (對照) DC-2 141 3.98 M-1 (發明) D-17 144 5.55 此表顯示本發明之顯影劑,當產生開始溫度相等物或較 對照顯影劑佳時,產生相當改良之尖峰差別。 實例2 類似先前實例進行以下實例,除了從塗料格式刪除基礎 釋放劑(三氣乙酸胍)外。根據下表2-1所列之格式,以各種 由改變參混顯影劑之變化而製備所有塗層實例。顯影劑之 參混發與實例1相同。所有塗層係於厚度7密耳之聚(對苯二 -86- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ---------·-·-------訂------- (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 A7 五、發明說明(84)A higher Dp 値 indicates that the noise signal generated by the developer is increased, which is desirable. Table 1-2 shows the results of the route used in Example 1. The listed items are developers, starting temperature T. , And the relative difference, Dp. The comparative example developer is a material known in the art. Table 1-2 Coating developer T0 (° C) Dp CM-1 (control) DC-1 191 0.23 C-1-2 (control) DC-2 141 3.98 M-1 (invention) D-17 144 5.55 This table shows that the developer of the present invention, when producing an equivalent starting temperature or better than a control developer, produces a fairly improved spike difference. Example 2 The following example was performed similar to the previous example, except that the base release agent (guanidine triacetate) was removed from the coating format. All coating examples were prepared according to the format listed in Table 2-1 below, in various variations by varying the mixed developer. The developer mixed hair was the same as in Example 1. All coatings are poly 7 mil thick (terephthalene-86- This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) --------- ·-·- ------ Order ------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) 588213 A7 V. Description of the invention (84)

1-本基-5-鏡四口坐 兄/卞万公又 〇·32克/平方公尺 經石灰處理之明膠 4·31克/平方公尺 顯影劑 莫耳/平方公尺 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) §1-benji-5-mirror with four mouths / 卞万公 and 0.32 g / m2 lime-treated gelatin 4.31 g / m2 developer Moore / m2 (please read the Please fill in this page again for attention) §

ϋ ϋ I 于座玍 &lt; 坌層、.至由階梯形械子曝光於藉由日光5 A和雷騰 2B濾鏡3000K濾光之3.04 log勒克司光源。曝光時間爲j 秒。曝光後,將塗層接觸加熱壓板2〇秒而熱處理。以各種 壓板溫度處理許多條,以便產生最佳之條處理環境。以實 例1之方法測量二個照相係數。將產生之係數示於表2_2 中。 I I I訂 % 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 表2-2 塗層 顯影劑 T〇 (°C) Dp C-2-1 (對照) DC-1 164 3.61 C-2-2 (對照) DC-2 170 3.20 1-2-1 (發明) D-28 140 6.49 1-2-2 (發明) D-29 164 5.40 此表顯示本發明之顯影劑提供開始溫度降低,而提供實 -87- 紙 本 t度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 Γ____Β7 五、發明說明(85) 質上改良之尖峰差別。 實例3 類似先前實例進行以下實例,除了參混之顯影劑製備和 塗層格式外。藉由以下球磨步驟製備參混之結晶顯影劑。 於合計10克樣品添加1克參混之顯影劑,〇 · 15克聚乙晞ρ比洛 啶酮,8.85克蒸餾水,和1〇毫升氧化錘珠粒。將漿液球磨 24小時。球磨後過濾移除氧化鍺珠粒。使用前將漿液冷 藏。 根據下表3-1所列之格式,以各種由改變參混顯影劑之變 化而製備所有塗層實例。將塗料之pH調整至一般値6.0。 所有塗層係於厚度7哺耳之聚(對苯二酸乙二醇)支撑體上製 備。 ----------^w— -------訂· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 表3-1 :基本格式 組份 沉積 銀(來自乳液Ε·1) 0.86克/平方公尺 銀(來自銀鹽SS-1) 0.54克/平方公尺 偶合劑Μ-1 (來自偶合劑分散液CDM-1) 0.54克/平方公尺 水楊酿苯胺 U)8克/平方公尺 1-苯基-5-魏四唑 0.32克/平方公尺 經石灰處理之明膠 6.09克/平方公尺 顯影劑 1·〇8毫莫耳/平方公尺 熔融pH 6.0 ,,,/工山〜土 π、,一&quot;,π〜π秸田w元5A和雷騰 2B滤鏡5500K滤光之2.40 log勒克司光源。曝光時間爲1 〇 88 % 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) A7ϋ ϋ I 玍 座 &lt; 坌 layer, to exposure from the stepped machine to 3.04 log Lux light source with 3000K filtering by daylight 5 A and Leighton 2B filter. The exposure time is j seconds. After exposure, the coating was heat-treated by contacting the heated platen for 20 seconds. Many strips are processed at various platen temperatures to produce the best strip processing environment. Two photographic factors were measured in the same manner as in Example 1. The resulting coefficients are shown in Table 2_2. Order III. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Table 2-2 Coating Developer T〇 (° C) Dp C-2-1 (Control) DC-1 164 3.61 C-2-2 (Control) DC -2 170 3.20 1-2-1 (invention) D-28 140 6.49 1-2-2 (invention) D-29 164 5.40 This table shows that the developer supply start temperature of the present invention is lowered, and real-87- paper is provided. This t-degree applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7 Γ ____ B7 V. Description of the invention (85) The sharp difference in quality improvement. Example 3 The following examples were carried out similarly to the previous examples, except that the developer preparation and coating format were mixed. The blended crystalline developer was prepared by the following ball milling steps. To a total of 10 grams of sample was added 1 gram of the mixed developer, 0.15 g of polyethylenepyrrolidone, 8.85 g of distilled water, and 10 ml of oxidized hammer beads. The slurry was ball milled for 24 hours. After ball milling, the germanium oxide beads were removed by filtration. Freeze the slurry before use. All coating examples were prepared according to the format listed in Table 3-1 below in various variations by varying the participating developer. Adjust the pH of the coating to generally 値 6.0. All coatings were prepared on poly (ethylene terephthalate) support with a thickness of 7 ears. ---------- ^ w— ------- Order · (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Form 3-1: Basic Format Components Deposited Silver (from emulsion E · 1) 0.86 g / m² Silver (from silver salt SS-1) 0.54 g / m² Coupling agent M-1 (from coupling agent dispersion CDM-1) 0.54 G / m2 salicylide aniline U) 8 g / m2 1-phenyl-5-weitetrazol 0.32 g / m2 Lime-treated gelatin 6.09 g / m2 developer 1.08 Millimoles / square meter melting pH 6.0, 2., / Gongshan ~ soil π ,, a &quot;, π ~ π straw field 5 yuan 5A and Lei Teng 2B filter 5500K filter 2.40 log Lux light source. Exposure time is 1.08%. This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 public love) A7

五、發明說明(86 ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 少。曝光後,將塗層接觸加熱壓板而熱處理。評比塗料心 新鮮影像差別和高錢原料料。比較新鮮塗層最低密度 和塗料最低密度之高濕度保存測試係置於5(rc和8G%相對 濕度之加熱爐中24小時。此測試之結果列於V. Description of the invention (86) There are few prints of employee cooperatives in the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. After the exposure, the coating was heat-treated by contacting the heated platen. Evaluation of paint heart Fresh image difference and high-cost raw materials. The high humidity storage test comparing the minimum density of fresh coatings with the minimum density of coatings was placed in a heating furnace at 5 (rc and 8G% relative humidity) for 24 hours. The results of this test are listed in

表中數據清楚地表示,相對於對照實例,本 斷顯影劑具有優良新鮮影像差別,和高濕度原料保存。具 非常低差別之塗料不產生記錄高濕度保存信號之足夠密 度。 實例4 以下實例包括類似實例3之方法製備之塗料。塗料格式 包括如下所列之改變。 根據下表4-1所列之格式,以各種由改變參混顯影劑之變 -89- 本紙張尺度適巾關家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公楚 ---------·#------ —訂--------- i丨· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 588213 A7 _____B7 五、發明說明(87) 化而製備所有塗層實例。評比四種本發明之顯影劑。所有 塗層係於厚度7¾、耳之聚(對苯二酸乙二醇)支撑體上製備。 _ 表4-1 : 基本格式 組份 沉積 銀(來自乳液E-1) 0.86克/平方公尺 偶合劑C-2 (來自偶合劑分散液CDC-2) 1.08克/平方公尺 顯影劑 0.86克/平方公尺 抗朦霧劑AF-1 15毫克/平方公尺 硬化劑B-1 58毫克/平方公尺 經石灰處理之明膠 3.23克/平方公尺 顯影劑 0.86克/平方公尺 將產生之塗層經由階梯形械子曝光於藉由日光5 A和雷騰 2B濾鏡5500K濾光之2.40 log勒克司光源。曝光時間爲丨/5〇 秒。曝光後,將塗層浸泡於活化劑A或B中15秒,並層壓^爲 含1.08克/平方公尺明膠之被動塗層。其後將薄膜包裝接觸 50或70°C之加熱壓板1〇秒而處理。觀察經阻斷彩色顯影劑 D-28,D-3 8和D-39之負片青色染料影像。觀察經阻斷黑白 顯影劑D-30之銀比例影像。結果摘錄於表4-2中。各塗層之 測量密度爲Status Μ紅色密度。 活化劑A :(蒸餾水中之重量比濃度) 2.65%碳酸鈉 0.63%重碳酸鈉 0.1%溴化鈉 0.2%亞硫酸鈉境 -90-— 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 588213 A7 _B7 五、發明說明(88)The data in the table clearly show that compared with the control example, this developer has excellent fresh image difference, and high humidity raw material storage. Coatings with very low differences do not produce enough density to record high humidity preservation signals. Example 4 The following examples include coatings prepared in a manner similar to Example 3. The coating format includes the changes listed below. According to the format listed in the following table 4-1, the developer can be changed in various ways by changing the mixed developer. -89- This paper size conforms to the family standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297). -· # ------ —Order --------- i 丨 · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumer Cooperatives 588213 A7 _____B7 V. Description of the invention (87) All coating examples were prepared. Four developers of the present invention were compared. All coatings were prepared on a polyether (ethylene terephthalate) support with a thickness of 7¾. _ Table 4-1: Basic Format Components Deposited Silver (from Emulsion E-1) 0.86 g / m² Coupler C-2 (from Coupling Agent Dispersion CDC-2) 1.08 g / m² Developer 0.86 g / Anti-mist agent AF-1 15 mg / m 2 Hardener B-1 58 mg / m 2 Lime-treated gelatin 3.23 g / m 2 Developer 0.86 g / m 2 The layer was exposed to a 2.40 log Lux light source with a 5500K filter by daylight 5 A and a 5200K filter by a stepped mechanism. The exposure time was 丨 / 50 seconds. After exposure, the coating was applied. Immerse in activator A or B for 15 seconds, and laminate ^ as a passive coating containing 1.08 g / m² gelatin. Thereafter, the film package is contacted with a heated platen at 50 or 70 ° C for 10 seconds and processed. Observation Negative cyan dye images of blocked color developers D-28, D-3 8 and D-39. Observe the silver ratio images of blocked black and white developer D-30. The results are summarized in Table 4-2. Each coating The measured density of the layer is the red density of Status M. Activator A: (weight ratio concentration in distilled water) 2.65% sodium carbonate 0.63% sodium bicarbonate 0.1% sodium bromide 0.2% sodium sulfite Jing-90-— This paper scale applies to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------- Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 588213 A7 _B7 V. Description of the invention (88)

活化劑B : 74.5克/公升KOH 8克/公升亞硫酸奸 2克/公升溴化钟 表4-2 -91 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ----------·-#-------訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 塗料 顯影劑 活化劑/時間/溫度 Dmax 1-4-1 D-28 A/10V70 C 0.53 A/10V90 C 1.40 B/10V50 C 0.40 B/10V70 C 2.25 B/10V90 C 4.92 1-4-2 D-38 A/10V50 C 0.09 A/10V70 C 0.89 A/10V90 C 1.20 1-4-3 D-39 A/10V70 C 0.56 A/10V90 C 0.92 B/10V70 C 0.43 B/10V90 C 1.26 1-4-4 D-30 A/10V50 C 0.21 A/10V70 C 0.24 A/10V90 C 0.26 B/10V50 C 0.12 B/10V70 C 0.19 B/10,,/90 C 0.29 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 588213 A7 _____B7__ 五、發明說明(89) 實例5 以下實例類似先前實例,除了從含乳液層移除經阻斷顯 影劑,並置於分離層中外。以含鹼浴將塗料類似地活化。 根據下表5-1所列之格式製備乳液塗料實例。該塗層包括 具明膠覆蓋層之乳液層。所有塗層係於厚度7密耳之聚(對 苯二酸乙二醇)支撑體上製備。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) •-------訂---------鲁. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 組份 沉積 顯影劑 0.67毫當量/平方公尺 經石灰處理之明膠 1.61克/平方公尺 硬化劑B-1 29毫克/平方公尺 -92- 表5-1 組份 沉積 銀(來自乳液E-1) 0.86克/平方公尺 偶合劑C-2 (來自偶合劑分散液CDC-2) 1·〇8克/平方公尺 抗朦霧劑AF-1 15毫克/平方公尺 經石灰處理之明膠 3.23克/平方公尺 覆蓋層明膠 0.43克/平方公尺 硬化劑B-1 66毫克/平方公尺 層壓層由顯影劑和明膠組成,並經根據下表5_2中所列之 格式塗佈。校正顯影劑質量沉積之分子量和每分子所釋放 顯影劑之當量。所有塗層係於厚度7嘧耳之聚(對苯二酸乙 二醇)支撑體上製備。 ΕΛ 張 紙 本 L度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 χ 297公楚) 588213 A7 五、發明說明(91) 實例6 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 產生如圖6-1中所述之多層顯影元件,以顯示本發明之顯 影劑提供足夠成像能力,以容許用於欲捕捉活潑景物之全 彩色光感熱照相元件。 圖6-1 覆蓋層 U克/平方公尺明膠 克/平方公尺硬化劑] 黃色感光層 〇·39克/平方公尺來自乳液EY—iiAgBrl 〇·6克/平方公尺來自乳液ey-2之AgBrI 〇·32克/平方公尺來自ss-1之苯並三唑銀 〇·32克/平方公尺來自SS-2之銀-1-苯基-5-巯四唑 〇·54克/平方公尺來自分散液CDY-1之偶合劑Y-1 〇·86克/平方公尺顯影劑d-28 0.86克/平方公尺水楊丙醯胺 4.3克/平方公尺明膠 綠色感光層 〇·39克/平方公尺來自乳液ΕΜ-1之AgBfl 〇·6克/平方公尺來自乳液EM-2之AgBrI 〇·32克/平方公尺來自SS-1之苯並三唑銀 0.32克/平方公尺來自SS-2之銀-1-苯基-5 -疏四口坐 〇·54克/平方公尺來自分散液CDM-1之偶合劑M-1 〇·86克/平方公尺顯影劑D-28 〇·86克/平方公尺水楊丙醯胺 4.3克/平方公尺明膠 -94- ----------------^---------·-· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 —--B7______ 五、發明說明(92) 紅色感光層 〇·39克/平方公尺來自乳液EC-1之AgBrI 〇·6克/平方公尺來自乳液EC-2之AgBrI 0·32克/平方公尺來自SS-1之苯並三唾銀 0.32克/平方公尺來自SS-2之銀-1-苯基- 5-¾¾四唉 〇·54克/平方公尺來自分散液CDC-1之偶合劑c-i 〇·86克/平方公尺顯影劑D-28 〇·86克/平方公尺水楊丙醯胺 4.3克/平方公尺明膠 支撑體 聚(對酞酸伸乙酯)支撑體(厚度7密耳) f請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} 將產生之塗層經由階梯形械子曝光於藉由曰光5 A和雷騰 2B應1¾ 5500K滤光之2·40 log勒克司光源。曝光時間爲〇 1 秒。曝光後’將薄膜包裝接觸145°C之加熱壓板2〇秒而熱 壓。接著將塗層以浸泡於15。(:之多彩色定影液中2分鐘而 疋影。使用status Μ彩色輪廓獨取青,紫紅和黃色密度, 產生下表6-1所列之密度。從所有三個色頻中形成之實質上 全影像密度清楚地發現,塗層係作爲捕捉多色彩資訊之有 用照相元件。 -------訂--------- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 表6-2 1己錄 Dmin Dmax 青色 0.58 1.43 紫紅色 0.8 2.12 黃色 0.64 1.68 將本實例之軟片元件裝填於裝置50亳米/η·7鏡頭之單眼 -95- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 A7 B7 五 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 發明說明(93) 伸細照相機中。將照相機之曝光控制設定於asa⑽,^ :此照相元件捕捉生動景物”^丨价加熱卿而將夭 件顯影’產生清楚可辨之負片影像,其後 液中而將元件定影。 u巴疋私 二將產生t影像以柯達照相光碟掃描器。將因而得到之數 位影像裝填於Adobe Photoshop (5.0.2版),其中以數位古十 校正,調整色調尺和色彩飽和’因而得到可接受之影像: 利用電腦監示器如軟體般觀看影像。其後將影像檔案送到 柯達865〇染料昇華印片機,得到品質可接受之硬式拷貝輸 出。此説明含本發明化合物之元件於完全顯影鏈中之用 途。 實例7 產生如圖7-1中所述之多層顯影元件,以顯示本發明之顯 影劑提供足夠成像能力,以容許用於欲捕捉生動景物之全 彩色光感熱照相元件。本實例之多層元件產生不具濕處理 步驟之影像。 覆蓋層 1 · 1克/平方公尺明膠 〇·32克/平方公尺硬化劑_2 快速黃色 0.54克/平方公尺來自乳液ΕΥ-3之AgBrI 〇·17克/平方公尺來自SS-1之苯並三唑銀 〇·Π克/平方公尺來自SS-2之銀-1_苯基-5-巯四唾 〇·29克/平方公尺來自分散液CDY-1之偶合劑γβ1 〇·46克/平方公尺顯影劑d-28 〇·46克/平方公尺水楊丙醯胺 2.3克/平方公尺明膠 96- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ·· ^^^-------tr--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Activator B: 74.5 g / L KOH 8 g / L sulfite 2 g / L Brominated clock 4-2 -91-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)- -------- ·-# ------- Order --------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Coating developer activator / time / temperature Dmax 1-4-1 D-28 A / 10V70 C 0.53 A / 10V90 C 1.40 B / 10V50 C 0.40 B / 10V70 C 2.25 B / 10V90 C 4.92 1-4-2 D-38 A / 10V50 C 0.09 A / 10V70 C 0.89 A / 10V90 C 1.20 1-4-3 D-39 A / 10V70 C 0.56 A / 10V90 C 0.92 B / 10V70 C 0.43 B / 10V90 C 1.26 1-4-4 D-30 A / 10V50 C 0.21 A / 10V70 C 0.24 A / 10V90 C 0.26 B / 10V50 C 0.12 B / 10V70 C 0.19 B / 10, / 90 C 0.29 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 588213 A7 _____B7__ V. Description of the invention (89) Example 5 below The examples are similar to the previous examples, except that the blocked developer is removed from the emulsion-containing layer and placed in a separation layer. The coating was similarly activated in an alkali-containing bath. Examples of emulsion coatings were prepared according to the format listed in Table 5-1 below. The coating includes an emulsion layer with a gelatin overlay. All coatings were prepared on a poly (ethylene terephthalate) support with a thickness of 7 mils. (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) • ------- Order --------- Lu. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the component deposition developer 0.67 millimeters Equivalent / square meter Lime-treated gelatin 1.61 g / square meter Hardener B-1 29 mg / square meter-92- Table 5-1 Component deposited silver (from emulsion E-1) 0.86 g / square meter Coupling C-2 (from Coupling Dispersion CDC-2) 1.08 g / m² Anti-Haze Agent AF-1 15 mg / m² Lime-treated gelatin 3.23 g / m² Cover Layer Gelatin 0.43 g / m² Hardener B-1 66 mg / m² The laminated layer consists of a developer and gelatin and is coated according to the format listed in Table 5_2 below. Correct the molecular weight of the developer deposited and the equivalent amount of developer released per molecule. All coatings were prepared on a poly (ethylene terephthalate) support with a thickness of 7 pyrimole. ΕΛ The paper L degree applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × χ297), 588213 A7 V. Description of the invention (91) Example 6 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, as shown in Figure 6-1 The multi-layer developing element described in the above shows that the developer of the present invention provides sufficient imaging capability to allow a full-color photothermographic element for capturing a lively scene. Figure 6-1 Covering layer U g / m 2 Gelatin g / m 2 Hardener] Yellow photosensitive layer 0.39 g / m 2 from emulsion EY—iiAgBrl 0.6 g / m 2 from emulsion ey-2 AgBrI 0.32 g / m2 silver benzotriazole from ss-1 0.32 g / m2 silver-1-phenyl-5-mercaptotetrazole 0.54 g / s from SS-2 Coupling agent Y-1 from dispersion CDY-1 0.86 g / m² developer d-28 0.86 g / m² Salicylamine 4.3 g / m² Gelatin green photosensitive layer 0.39 G / m2 AgBfl from emulsion EM-1 0.6 g / m2 AgBrI from emulsion EM-2 0.32 g / m2 silver benzotriazole from SS-1 0.32 g / m2 Ruler from silver -1-phenyl-5-SS-2 from SS-2 0.54 g / m2 coupling agent M-1 from dispersion CDM-1 0.86 g / m2 developer D -28 〇 · 86g / sqm salicylamine 4.3g / sqm gelatin -94- ---------------- ^ --------- · -· (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ) 588213 A7 --- B7______ 5. Description of the invention (92) Red photosensitive layer 0.39 g / m2 AgBrI from emulsion EC-1 0.6 g / m2 AgBrI 0.32 from emulsion EC-2 G / m2 benzotrisaliferous silver from SS-1 0.32 g / m2 silver -1-phenyl-5-2-¾¾ from SS-2 5.4 g / m2 from dispersion CDC Coupling agent of -1 ci 0.86 g / m2 developer D-28 0.86 g / m2 salicylamide 4.3 g / m2 gelatin support poly (ethyl terephthalate) support (Thickness 7 mils) f Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page} The resulting coating is exposed through a stepped machine to 2 · 40 of 5500K filtered by Yueguang 5 A and Lei Teng 2B. log Lux light source. The exposure time is 0.01 seconds. After the exposure ', the film package was heat-pressed by contacting a heated platen at 145 ° C for 20 seconds. The coating was then immersed in 15. (: As much as 2 minutes in the color fixing solution. Use status MU color profile to independently take the cyan, magenta and yellow densities to produce the densities listed in Table 6-1 below. Essentially formed from all three color frequencies The full image density clearly shows that the coating is a useful photographic element for capturing multi-color information. ------- Order --------- Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 2 1 Recorded Dmin Dmax Cyan 0.58 1.43 Fuchsia 0.8 2.12 Yellow 0.64 1.68 The film element of this example is loaded into the single eye of the device 50 亳 m / η · 7 lens -95- This paper standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A7 B7 Five inventions printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (93) Slim camera. Set the camera's exposure control to asa⑽, ^: This photographic element captures vivid sceneries" ^丨 The price is heated to develop the document to produce a clearly identifiable negative image, and then the component is fixed in the liquid. U Ba Yishen will produce a t image to a Kodak photo disc scanner. The resulting digital image is loaded At Ado be Photoshop (version 5.0.2), which uses digital ancient ten correction, adjusts the tone scale and color saturation, and thus obtains an acceptable image: use a computer monitor to view the image as software. Then send the image file to Kodak 865 〇Dye-sublimation printers, with hard copy output of acceptable quality. This illustrates the use of components containing the compounds of the present invention in a complete development chain. Example 7 A multi-layer development component as shown in Figure 7-1 was produced for display The developer of the present invention provides sufficient imaging capability to allow full-color photothermographic elements to be used to capture vivid scenes. The multilayer element of this example produces images without a wet processing step. Overlay 1 · 1 g / m² gelatin 〇32g / m2 hardener_2 Fast yellow 0.54g / m2 AgBrI from emulsion EΥ-3 〇17g / m2 silver benzotriazole from SS-1 Silver-1_phenyl-5-mercaptotetrathiazine from SS-2 0.29 g / m2 Coupler γβ1 from dispersion CDY-1 0.46 g / m2 developer d- 28.46 g / m2 Salicylamine 2.3 / Square meter gelatin 96- This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) · ^^^ ------- tr --------- (Please (Read the notes on the back before filling out this page)

發明說明(94) 五 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 鍰慢黃色 〇·27克/平方公尺來自乳液EY-4之AgBrI 〇·16克/平方公尺來自乳液EY-5之AgBrI 〇·15克/平方公尺來自SS_i之苯並三唑銀 〇·15克/平方公尺來自SS_2之銀-1-苯基-5-巯四唑 〇·25克/平方公尺來自分散液CDY-1之偶合劑Y-1 〇·40克/平方公尺顯影劑d-28 〇·40克/平方公尺水楊丙酿胺 2·〇克/平方公尺明膠 黃色濾鏡 〇·〇8克/平方公尺SY-2 1·〇7克/平方公尺明膠 快速紫紅 〇·54克/平方公尺來自乳液εμ-3之AgBrI 〇·π克/平方公尺來自SS-1之苯並三唑銀 0·1?克/平方公尺來自SS-2之銀-1-苯基-5-巯四唑 〇·29克/平方公尺來自分散液cdM-2之偶合劑Μ-2 〇·46克/平方公尺顯影劑d-28 〇·46克/平方公尺水楊丙醯胺 ------ 克/平方公尺明膠 緩慢黃色 〇·27克/平方公尺來自乳液em-4之AgBrI 〇·16克/平方公尺來自乳液em-5之AgBrI ο·1〗克/平方公尺來自SS-1之苯並三唑銀 〇·15克/平方公尺來自ss_2之銀j·苯基-5_巯四唑 〇·25克/平方公尺來自分散液cdM-2之偶合劑M-2 0·40克7平方公尺顯影劑D-28 〇·40克/平方公尺水楊丙醯胺 -----— 克/平立公尺明膠 Q7 - J張 紙 本Description of the Invention (94) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 锾 Slow yellow 〇27g / m2 AgBrI from emulsion EY-4 〇16g / m2 AgBrI from emulsion EY-5 〇 15g / m2 silver benzotriazole from SS_i 0.15g / m2 silver-1-phenyl-5-mercaptotetrazole from SS_2 0.25g / m2 from dispersion CDY Coupler of -1 Y-1 0.40 g / m2 developer d-28 0.40 g / m2 salicylamine 2.0 g / m2 gelatin yellow filter 0.08 G / m2 SY-2 1.07 g / m2 gelatin fast purple red 0.54 g / m2 AgBrI from emulsion εμ-3 0 · π g / m2 benzo from SS-1 Silver triazole silver 0.1 g / m² Silver -1-phenyl-5-mercaptotetrazole from SS-2 0.29 g / m² Coupling agent M-2 from dispersion cdM-2 46g / m2 developer d-28 〇46g / m2 salicylamine ------ g / m2 gelatin slow yellow 〇27g / m2 from emulsion em-4 AgBrI 〇 · 16 g / m 2 AgBrI from emulsion em-5 ο · 1〗 g / Square meter silver benzotriazole from SS-1 0.15 g / m2 Silver j · phenyl-5_mercaptotetrazole from ss_2 0.25 g / m2 from dispersion cdM-2 Coupling agent M-2 0 · 40 g 7 m 2 developer D-28 0 · 40 g / m 2 salicylamine -----— g / m 3 gelatin Q7-J sheets

297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) #-------^---------龜-♦. 588213 Α7 __________ Β7 五、發明說明(95) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 内層 1.07克/平方公尺明膠 快速青色 0.54克/平方公尺來自乳液EC-3之AgBrI 〇·17克/平方公尺來自SS-1之苯並三唑銀 〇·17克/平方公尺來自SS-2之銀-1-苯基-5-巯四唑 0.29克/平方公尺來自分散液CDC-1之偶合劑CM 〇·46克/平方公尺顯影劑D-28 〇·46克/平方公尺水楊丙醯胺 2.3克/平方公尺明膠 緩慢青色層 〇·27克/平方公尺來自乳液EC-4之AgBrI 〇·16克/平方公尺來自乳液EC-5之AgBrI 〇·15克/平方公尺來自SS-1之苯並三唑銀 〇·15克/平方公尺來自SS-2之銀-1-苯基·5-巯四唾 0.25克/平方公尺來自分散液CDC-1之偶合劑CM 〇·40克/平方公尺顯影劑d-28 〇·40克/平方公尺水楊丙醯胺 2·〇克/平方公尺明膠 抗暈層 〇·〇5克/平方公尺碳 1.6克/平方公尺明膠 支撑體 聚(對酞酸伸乙酯)支撑體(厚度7密耳) 將產生之塗層經由階梯形械子曝光於藉由曰光5 A和雷騰 2B滤鏡5500K遽光之1.8 log勒克司光源。曝光時間爲〇 ^ 秒。曝光後’將薄膜包裝接觸14 5 C之加熱壓板2 〇秒而熱 壓。使用status Μ彩色輪廓獨取青,紫紅和黃色密度,產 -98- ---------Φ·-------訂 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ρβ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) # ------- ^ --------- Turtle- ♦. 588213 Α7 __________ Β7 V. Description of the Invention (95) Printed inner layer 1.07 g / m² gelatin fast cyan 0.54 g / m² AgBrI from emulsion EC-3 〇.17 g / m² benzotriazole from SS-1 Silver 0.17 g / m² Silver -1-phenyl-5-mercaptotetrazole from SS-2 0.29 g / m² Coupling agent CM from dispersion CDC-1 0.46 g / m² Developer D-28 0.46 g / m2 Salicylamine 2.3 g / m2 Gelatin slow cyan layer 0.27 g / m2 AgBrI from Emulsion EC-4 0.16 g / m2 Emulsion EC-5 AgBrI 0.15 g / m2 silver benzotriazole from SS-1 0.15 g / m2 silver -1-phenyl · 5-mercaptotetrasulfa from SS-2 0.25 G / m2 from coupling agent CM of dispersion CDC-1 CM40.40g / m2 developer d-28.40g / m2 salicylamamine 2.0 g / m2 gelatin anti-halo Layer 0. 05 g / m2 carbon 1.6 g / m2 Ruler gelatin support poly (ethyl terephthalate) support (thickness 7 mils) The resulting coating is exposed through a stepped mechanism to a light of 5500K with a light filter of 5A and a Leighton 2B. log Lux light source. The exposure time is 0 ^ seconds. After exposure ', the film package was contacted with a heated platen at 14 5 C for 20 seconds and hot-pressed. Use status Μ color profile to take cyan, magenta and yellow density separately, produce -98- --------- Φ · ------- Order (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ρβ This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213

A7 發明說明(96) 生下表7-2所列之密度。從所古― n ^ 疋所有二個色頻中形成之實質上人 影像密度清楚地發現,塗層係 货上王 照相元#。 胃係作㉝触多色彩資訊之有用 將實例5之軟片元件裝填毫米/fl 7鏡-^ 伸縮照相機中。將照相機之曝光控制設定於asa剛,並 以此照相元件捕捉生動景物。以在145。〇加熱2〇秒而將元 件顯影’產生清楚可辨之負片影像,接著該元件無沖洗加 工〇 將產生之影像以尼可(Nikon) LS2000軟片掃描器掃描。將 因而仔到之數位影像裝填於Adobe Photoshop (5.0.2版),其 中以數位方式校正,調整色調比例和色彩飽和,因而得到 可接受之影像。利用電腦監示器如軟體般觀看影像。其後 將影像檔案送到柯達8650染料昇華茚片機,得到品質可接 受之硬式拷貝輸出。此説明含本發明化合物之元件於完全 顯影鏈中之用途。 實例8 : 於模型系統中進行測量,研究本發明之顯影劑之未阻斷 動力。使用二種分離技術得到這些動力之資訊: 1 ·將經阻斷顯影劑D-n於甲颯(DMS0,艾德瑞克(Aldrich) -99- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} Φ------ —訂-------- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 哪213 A7 五、發明說明(97) 99.8+%無水)之(MmM溶液在氮大氣下於13〇C或其它 設定溫度加熱。經阻斷顯影劑消失後以不同時間區間 採取等份試樣,於冷水中迅速冷卻,並以高壓液體層 析術(HPLC)分析。後得到去阻斷反應之速率常數(k)和 半生期(t1/2)。 2 ·偵測釋放之顯色劑亦能夠完成監控熱解反應。採取反 應溶液於DMSO之等份試樣,並將釋放顯影劑在pH 10 以偶合劑C-3轉變爲染料。於1公分小室内以光譜計於 〜568耄微米將染料定量,能夠得到反應之速率常數。 代表性結果列於下表8-1中。能夠見到本發明之、經阻斷顯 影劑以任一偵測法產生之t丨,2値皆低於對照實例。(丨,2値越 低表7F顯影劑越具活性,其爲希望得到的。 組阻斷顯影劑 DC-3 (對照) DC-4 (對照) D-6 (本發明) D-16 (本發明) ------- D-28 (本發明) # 表8-1 分鐘,方法1 6.83 20,16 0.944 0.587 ^1/2 J分鐘,方法2 7.60 18.2 0.893 0.722 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) _! 訂-------- 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 -100-A7 Description of Invention (96) The densities listed in Table 7-2 are given below. It is clear from the actual human image density formed in all two color frequencies of the ancient ^ n ^ , that the coating is the 上 上 王 摄影 元 #. Stomach is useful for multi-touch information. The film element of Example 5 was loaded in a mm / fl 7 lens- ^ telescopic camera. Set the camera's exposure control to asa, and use this camera to capture vivid scenes. Taking at 145. 〇Heating for 20 seconds to develop the element &apos; produces a clearly identifiable negative image, and then the element is processed without processing. The resulting image is scanned with a Nikon LS2000 film scanner. The resulting digital image was loaded into Adobe Photoshop (version 5.0.2), which was digitally corrected, adjusted tonal ratio and color saturation, so that an acceptable image was obtained. Use a computer monitor to view images like software. Thereafter, the image file was sent to a Kodak 8650 dye sublimation indene film processor, and an acceptable hard copy output was obtained. This illustrates the use of a device containing a compound of the invention in a complete development chain. Example 8: Measurements were performed in a model system to study the unblocked power of the developer of the present invention. Use two kinds of separation technology to get the information of these dynamics: 1 · Will block the developer Dn in formazan (DMS0, Aldrich -99-) This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page} Φ ------ —Order -------- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs which is 213 A7 V. Description of the invention (97) 99.8 +% anhydrous) (MmM solution is heated under nitrogen atmosphere at 13 ° C or other set temperature. After blocking the developer disappears, aliquots are taken at different time intervals and rapidly cooled in cold water And analyzed by high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC). Then the rate constant (k) and half-life (t1 / 2) of the deblocking reaction are obtained. 2 · Detecting the released color developer can also complete the monitoring of the pyrolysis reaction Take an aliquot of the reaction solution in DMSO and convert the released developer to a dye with coupling agent C-3 at pH 10. The dye can be quantified with a spectrometer at ~ 568 μm in a 1 cm chamber, and the reaction can be obtained. The rate constant. Representative results are listed in Table 8-1 below. After blocking the developer, any of the detection methods produced by t 丨, 2 値 are lower than the control example. (丨, the lower the 2 値 is, the more active the 7F developer is, which is expected. Group blocking developer DC-3 (control) DC-4 (control) D-6 (invention) D-16 (invention) ------- D-28 (invention) # Table 8-1 minutes, method 1 6.83 20,16 0.944 0.587 ^ 1/2 J minutes, method 2 7.60 18.2 0.893 0.722 (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) _! Order -------- Printed by the Consumer Property Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs -100-

Claims (1)

588213588213 4·.'. ____〜一' 第08912^841號專利申請案 ''中是申鹫·專利範圍替換本(93年4月) 8 8 8 8 A B c D4 ·. '. ____ ~ 一' Patent Application No. 08912 ^ 841 '' is the application of the patent application. (April 1993) 8 8 8 8 A B c D 利範圍 照相或光感熱照相顯影元件,其包括與結構I化合 物相關之顯影層:Benefits: Photographic or photothermographic developing elements, which include a developing layer related to the structure I compound: W(w) X PUG--(LINK 1)ι-(TIME)m-(LTNK 2)n- \ I 其中: PUG為一種可用於照相之基; LINK 1和LINK 2為鍵聯基; TIME為計時基; 1為0或1 ; m為0,1或2 ; η為0或1 ; Υ為 C,Ν,Ο或 S ; X為拉電子基; W為氫,自素或經取代或未經取代之烷基,環烷基, 芳基或雜環基,或者W能夠結合Τ或R12而形成環,當Υ 為C時W為0至3,當Y為N時w為0-2,當Y為Ο或3時\¥為Οι , 當 W為 2時 該二個 W基能夠 結合而 形成環 ,當 W為 3 時 該二個W基能夠結合形成環,或者該三個W基能夠結合 形成二環取代基; R12為氫,或經取代或未經取代之烷基,環、燒基,芳 基或雜環基,或者R12能夠結合T而形成環; 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 申請專利範圍 :為經取代或未經取代之烷基,環烷基,芳基或六員 基,t為0,,限制條件為倘若乂為砜基且&amp;和1 為1 ,且m和n各為〇,則或2;且倘若丈為2則該二 個T基能夠結合而形成環; X為一價,a為1或2 ,且b為1 ;及其中LINK1&amp; L IN K 2係獨立具有結構π : u) -〆·, II 其中 X表示碳或硫; Υ表不氧’硯或义心,其中心為經取代或未經取代之 火元基,或經取代或未經取代之芳基; Ρ為1或2 ; Ζ表示碳,氧或硫; r為0或1 ; 限制條件為當X為碳時,卩和^皆為i,當χ為硫γ為氧 時,ρ為2且r為0 ; #表示鍵結於PUG (關於LINK 1)或TIME (關於LINK 2); $表示鍵結於TIME (關於LINk 1)或T⑴經取代之碳(關 於 LINK 2)。 -2 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格 588213W (w) X PUG-(LINK 1) ι- (TIME) m- (LTNK 2) n- \ I where: PUG is a base that can be used for photography; LINK 1 and LINK 2 are bond groups; TIME is Timing base; 1 is 0 or 1; m is 0, 1 or 2; η is 0 or 1; Υ is C, N, 0 or S; X is an electron-withdrawing group; W is hydrogen, self-primed or substituted or unsubstituted Substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or heterocyclyl, or W can combine with T or R12 to form a ring. W is 0 to 3 when Υ is C, and w is 0-2 when Y is N. When Y is 〇 or 3, \ ¥ is Οι, when W is 2, the two W groups can combine to form a ring, when W is 3, the two W groups can combine to form a ring, or the three W groups can Combined to form a bicyclic substituent; R12 is hydrogen, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, ring, alkyl, aryl or heterocyclic group, or R12 can combine with T to form a ring; this paper size applies Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) Patent application scope: substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or six-membered group, t is 0, the limitation is that if 乂 is a sulfone group And &amp; and 1 are 1, and m and n are each 0, then or 2; If z is 2 then the two T groups can be combined to form a ring; X is monovalent, a is 1 or 2, and b is 1; and LINK1 &amp; L IN K 2 independently has the structure π: u) -〆 ·, II where X represents carbon or sulfur; Υrepresents oxygen or ethics, the center of which is a substituted or unsubstituted fire group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group; P is 1 or 2 Z represents carbon, oxygen, or sulfur; r is 0 or 1; the restriction is that when X is carbon, 卩 and ^ are both i, when χ is sulfur and γ is oxygen, ρ is 2 and r is 0; # means Bonded to PUG (about LINK 1) or TIME (about LINK 2); $ means bonded to TIME (about LINk 1) or T⑴ substituted carbon (about LINK 2). -2-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification 588213 2 .根據申請專利範圍第1項之顯影元件,其中puG為一種 偶合劑’顯影抑制劑,漂白促進劑,漂白抑制劑,抑 制劑釋放型顯影劑,染料先質,顯影劑,銀離子固定 劑’電子轉移劑,鹵化銀溶劑,函化銀錯合劑,還原 §同’影像調和劑,預沖洗加工或後沖洗加工影像安定 劑’硬化劑,鞣劑,朦霧劑,紫外光輻射吸收劑,成 核劑’化學或光譜感光劑,去感光劑,界面活性劑, 或其先質。 3·根據申請專利範圍第1或2項之顯影元件,其中τΙΜΕ為 冲時基’擇自如(1)使用芳香族親核性取代反應之基; (2)使用半縮趁裂解反應之基;(3)使用循共軛系統電子 轉移反應之基;和(4)使用分子間親核性取代反應之 基。 4 ·根據申請專利範圍第1或2項之顯影元件,其中結構I之 化合物係具有結構III :2. The developing element according to item 1 of the scope of the patent application, wherein puG is a coupling agent 'development inhibitor, bleach accelerator, bleach inhibitor, inhibitor release developer, dye precursor, developer, silver ion fixative 'Electron transfer agent, silver halide solvent, silver halide complex, reduction § Same as' image reconciler, pre-processing or post-processing image stabilizer' hardener, tanning agent, misting agent, ultraviolet radiation absorber Nucleating agents' chemical or spectral sensitizers, desensitizers, surfactants, or precursors thereof. 3. The developing element according to item 1 or 2 of the scope of the applied patent, wherein τΙΜΕ is a time-selection base, which can be chosen freely (1) using aromatic nucleophilicity to replace the reaction base; (2) using a semi-shrinking base while cleavage reaction; (3) the base of the electron transfer reaction using a conjugated system; and (4) the base of the reaction is replaced by intermolecular nucleophilicity. 4 · The developing element according to item 1 or 2 of the scope of patent application, wherein the compound of the structure I has the structure III: III 其中: Ζ為0Η或NR^R3 ’其中R2和R3獨立為氯或經取代或未 3- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 8 8 8 8 A B c D 、申請專利範圍 、,至取代之烷基,或者心和心連接而形成環; /5,R6’R々R8獨立為氫,自素’羥基,胺基&quot;充氧 基,碳酿胺基,橫酿胺基,燒續酿胺基或燒基, 3夠與WRA接’及/认能夠聯接於Ml而形 T為經取代或未經取代之燒基,環燒基,芳基或六元 雜%族基,t為0,丨或2,限制條件為倘若χ4颯基且a和 1各為卜且π^η各為〇’則t4l或2;且倘若…,則二 個T基能夠結合而形成環; Ru為氫,或經取代或未經取代之烷基,環烷基,芳 基或雜環基或能夠與τ或W結合而形成環; X為拉電子基; Υ為C,Ν,Ο或 s ; X為二價且a為1或2 ; b為1 ; W為氫,自素,或經取代或未經取代之烷基,環烷 基,芳基或雜環基,或者w能夠與T結合而形成環,當 Y為C時w為0至3,當Y為_w為〇-2 ,當¥為〇或為 0-1,當w為2時,二個W基能夠結合而形成環,當〜為3 時,一個W基能夠結合而形成環,或者三個w基能夠結 合而形成二環取代基。 5·根據申請專利範圍第1項之顯影元件,其為光感熱照相 元件,照相元件或感熱照相元件。 6· —種成像法,包括將經全影像曝光之根據申請專利範 本紙張尺度適用中國國家樣準(CNS) A4規格(210X 297公釐). A B c DIII Among which: Z is 0Η or NR ^ R3 'wherein R2 and R3 are independently chlorine or substituted or unused 3- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213 8 8 8 8 AB c D, patent application scope, to substituted alkyl, or heart-to-heart connection to form a ring; / 5, R6'R々R8 is independently hydrogen, from the prime 'hydroxyl, amino group &quot; oxygenation, carbon fermentation Amine group, horizontal amino group, continuous amino group or alkyl group, 3 can be connected to WRA 'and / recognized that it can be connected to Ml and the shape T is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group Or six-membered hetero% group group, t is 0, 丨 or 2, with the restriction that if χ4 飒 group and a and 1 are each Bu and π ^ η are each 0 ′ then t4l or 2; and if ... then two T group can be combined to form a ring; Ru is hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or heterocyclic group or can be combined with τ or W to form a ring; X is an electron-withdrawing group; Υ is C, N, 0 or s; X is divalent and a is 1 or 2; b is 1; W is hydrogen, from prime, or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or Heterocyclyl, or w can interact with T Combined to form a ring, when Y is C, w is 0 to 3, when Y is _w is 0-2, when ¥ is 0 or 0-1, and when w is 2, two W groups can be combined to form Ring, when ~ is 3, one W group can be combined to form a ring, or three w groups can be combined to form a bicyclic substituent. 5. The developing element according to item 1 of the scope of application for a patent, which is a photothermographic element, a photographic element, or a thermosensitive element. 6 · —A kind of imaging method, including the full-image exposure according to the patent application model paper size applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X 297 mm). A B c D 588213 、申請專利範圍 圍第1或2項之顯影元件顯影之步驟。 7. 根據申請專利範圍第6項之方法,其中該顯影包括將該 全影像曝光元件於90°C和180°C間之溫度下處理0.5至60 秒之時間。 8. —種成像法,包括將經全影像曝光及顯影之根據申請 專利範圍第1或2項之顯影元件掃描,以形成該全影像曝 光之第一電子影像表示之步驟。 9. 一種成像法,包括將所產生第一電子影像表示和經全 影像曝光,顯影及掃描之根據申請專利範圍第1或2項所 敘述之顯影元件數位化,以形成數位影像之步驟。 10. —種成像法,包括步驟為: 將經全影像曝光之根據申請專利範圍第1或2項之顯影 元件熱顯影,形成經顯影影像; 掃描該經顯影影像,形成來自該經顯影影像之第一電 子影像表示; 將該第一電子記錄數位化,形成一種數位影像; 調整該數位影像,形成第二電子影像表示;和 儲存,傳遞,列印或顯示該第二電子影像表示。 11. 一種照相或光感熱照相顯影元件,其包括與結構I化合 物相關之顯影層: I j . PUG-—(LINK 1),——(TIME)m——(LINK 2)n~ i ^12 -5- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)588213, the scope of application for patents The development steps of item 1 or 2 are developed. 7. The method according to item 6 of the patent application scope, wherein the developing comprises processing the full-image exposure element at a temperature between 90 ° C and 180 ° C for a time of 0.5 to 60 seconds. 8. An imaging method comprising the steps of scanning the developing element according to item 1 or 2 of the scope of the patent application after exposure and development of the full image to form a first electronic image representation of the full image exposure. 9. An imaging method comprising the steps of digitizing the generated first electronic image representation and the full-image exposure, development, and scanning of the developing elements described in item 1 or 2 of the scope of the patent application to form a digital image. 10. An imaging method comprising the steps of: thermally developing a developing element according to item 1 or 2 of the patent application scope after full image exposure to form a developed image; scanning the developed image to form a developed image from the developed image A first electronic image representation; digitizing the first electronic record to form a digital image; adjusting the digital image to form a second electronic image representation; and storing, transmitting, printing, or displaying the second electronic image representation. 11. A photographic or photothermographic developing element comprising a developing layer related to the compound of structure I: I j. PUG -— (LINK 1), —— (TIME) m —— (LINK 2) n ~ i ^ 12 -5- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 588213 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 其中: PUG為一種可用於照相之基; LINK 1和LINK 2為鍵聯基; TIME為計時基; 1為0或1 ; m為0,1或2 ; η為0或1 ; Υ為 C,Ν,0或 S ; X為拉電子基; W為氫,自素或經取代或未經取代之烷基,環烷基, 芳基或雜環基,或者W能夠結合Τ或R12而形成環,當Υ 為C時w為0至3,當Y為N時w為0-2,當Y為0或3時\¥為Οι , 當 w為 2時 該二個 W基能夠 結合而 形成環 ,當 w為 3 時 該二個W基能夠結合形成環,或者該三個W基能夠結合 形成二環取代基; R12為氫,或經取代或未經取代之烷基,環燒基,芳 基或雜環基,或者R12能夠結合T而形成環; T為經取代或未經取代之烷基,環烷基,芳基或六員 雜環基,t為0,1或2, 及倘t是2,二個T基可結合形成環; X是二價,a是2,且b是1;及 其中L I Ν K 1及L I Ν K 2係獨立具有結構11 : -6 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 588213 8 8 8 8 A B c D 六、申請專利範圍 ⑺P II 3 X $ II 其中 X表示碳或硫; Υ表示氧,硫或N-Ri,其中1^為經取代或未經取代之 烷基,或經取代或未經取代之芳基; p為1或2 ; Z表示碳,氧或硫; I·為0或1 ; 限制條件為當X為碳時,p和r皆為1,當X為硫Y為氧 時,p為2且r為0 ; #表示鍵結於PUG (關於LINK 1)或TIME (關於LINK 2); $表示鍵結於TIME (關於LINK 1)或T⑴經取代之碳(關 於 LINK 2)。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS) A4規格(210 X 297公釐)588213 A8 B8 C8 D8 Six. Patent application scope Among them: PUG is a base that can be used for photography; LINK 1 and LINK 2 are bonding groups; TIME is a timing base; 1 is 0 or 1; m is 0, 1 or 2; η is 0 or 1; Υ is C, N, 0 or S; X is an electron-withdrawing group; W is hydrogen, from a prime or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or heterocyclic group, Or W can form a ring by combining T or R12. When Υ is C, w is 0 to 3, when Y is N, w is 0-2, when Y is 0 or 3, \ ¥ is 〇ι, and when w is 2 The two W groups can be combined to form a ring. When w is 3, the two W groups can be combined to form a ring, or the three W groups can be combined to form a bicyclic substituent; R12 is hydrogen, or substituted or unsubstituted. Substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or heterocyclyl, or R12 can combine with T to form a ring; T is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl or six-membered heterocyclyl, t is 0, 1 or 2, and if t is 2, two T groups can be combined to form a ring; X is divalent, a is 2, and b is 1; and LI NK 1 and LI NK 2 are independent With structure 11: -6-This paper is of suitable size China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 588213 8 8 8 8 AB c D 6. Patent application scope ⑺P II 3 X $ II where X represents carbon or sulfur; Υ represents oxygen, sulfur or N-Ri , Where 1 ^ is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group; p is 1 or 2; Z represents carbon, oxygen, or sulfur; I · is 0 or 1; When X is carbon, both p and r are 1, when X is sulfur and Y is oxygen, p is 2 and r is 0; # indicates bonding to PUG (about LINK 1) or TIME (about LINK 2); $ Denotes bonding to TIME (about LINK 1) or T⑴ substituted carbon (about LINK 2). This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)
TW089126841A 1999-12-30 2000-12-15 Photographic or photothermographic imaging element and method of image formation TW588213B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US09/475,703 US6756192B1 (en) 1999-12-30 1999-12-30 Imaging element containing a blocked photographically useful compound
US09/614,035 US6759187B1 (en) 1999-12-30 2000-07-11 Imaging element containing a blocked photographically useful compound

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW588213B true TW588213B (en) 2004-05-21

Family

ID=27044899

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW089126841A TW588213B (en) 1999-12-30 2000-12-15 Photographic or photothermographic imaging element and method of image formation

Country Status (7)

Country Link
EP (2) EP1113316A3 (en)
JP (1) JP2001242605A (en)
KR (1) KR20010082583A (en)
CN (1) CN1301990A (en)
BR (1) BR0010438A (en)
CA (1) CA2328695A1 (en)
TW (1) TW588213B (en)

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6790569B2 (en) * 2000-06-13 2004-09-14 Eastman Kodak Company Color photothermographic elements comprising phenolic thermal solvents
JP2003043648A (en) 2001-05-23 2003-02-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Silver halide photographic sensitive material and image forming method using the same
US6645711B2 (en) 2001-07-18 2003-11-11 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Silver halide photographic light-sensitive material
US6531271B1 (en) * 2001-08-16 2003-03-11 Eastman Kodak Company Color photographic element comprising a multifunctional dye-forming coupler
US6576411B1 (en) * 2001-11-21 2003-06-10 Eastman Kodak Company Method of passivating a silver donor with a dye and photothermographic systems made thereby
US6497999B1 (en) * 2001-11-21 2002-12-24 Eastman Kodak Company Method of passivating silver donors in photothermographic systems and imaging elements made thereby
USD763730S1 (en) 2014-10-13 2016-08-16 Robert Nielsen Button cover with a clasp

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5814671B2 (en) * 1977-05-02 1983-03-22 富士写真フイルム株式会社 Color photographic material
JPS5849944A (en) * 1981-09-04 1983-03-24 Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd Color photosensitive material
JPS5895344A (en) * 1981-11-16 1983-06-06 Konishiroku Photo Ind Co Ltd Forming and processing method for image
JPS59111636A (en) * 1982-12-17 1984-06-27 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Thermodevelopable color photosensitive material
JPS61250636A (en) * 1985-04-30 1986-11-07 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Heat developable photosensitive material
JPS62131253A (en) * 1985-12-03 1987-06-13 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Image forming method
JPH083616B2 (en) * 1986-11-13 1996-01-17 富士写真フイルム株式会社 Color image forming method
US5773560A (en) * 1996-07-25 1998-06-30 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Silver halide color photographic light-sensitive material and color image forming method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1113316A3 (en) 2001-08-29
CA2328695A1 (en) 2001-06-30
CN1301990A (en) 2001-07-04
BR0010438A (en) 2002-06-25
EP1113316A2 (en) 2001-07-04
JP2001242605A (en) 2001-09-07
EP1113326A3 (en) 2001-08-29
KR20010082583A (en) 2001-08-30
EP1113326A2 (en) 2001-07-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6350566B2 (en) Packaged color photographic film comprising a blocked phenylenediamine developing agent and a method for processing the film
TW588213B (en) Photographic or photothermographic imaging element and method of image formation
US20020018967A1 (en) Processing system for a color photothermographic film comprising dry thermal development and wet-chemical remediation
TW200407661A (en) Mixtures of organic silver salts in color photothermographic systems
JP2001337410A (en) Image forming element containing protected photographically useful compound
US6306551B1 (en) Imaging element containing a blocked photographically useful compound
US6599684B2 (en) Color photothermographic element comprising a dye-forming system for forming a novel infrared dye
US6312879B1 (en) Photographic or photothermographic element containing a blocked photographically useful compound
US20020018944A1 (en) Processing of color photothermographic film comprising dry thermal development and wet-chemical remediation
US6506546B1 (en) Imaging element containing a blocked photographically useful compound
JP2001201830A (en) Image-forming element containing protected photographically useful compound
JP2002014448A (en) Image element
JP2002006439A (en) Image forming element including useful compound in protected photography
EP1290493A2 (en) Thermally developable imaging system comprising a blocked color-forming agent in association with a hydroxy-substituted aromatic compound for promoting image formation
US6570034B2 (en) Blocked phenylenediamine developers for a color photographic element
JP2002062612A (en) Photothermographic element containing mixture of protected developing agents
WO2001096950A1 (en) Packaged color photographic film capable of alternatively dry or wet-chemical processing
US6756192B1 (en) Imaging element containing a blocked photographically useful compound
KR20010112106A (en) Color photothermographic elements comprising blocked developing agents
CN1329282A (en) Photographic element with ion exchange compound
US20040142255A1 (en) Imaging element containing a blocked photographically useful compound
US6749977B1 (en) Imaging element containing a polymeric heteroaromatic blocked developer
JP2002006438A (en) Image forming element including useful compound in protected photography

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees